Download Samsung VP-X210L دليل المستخدم
Transcript
AR ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ VP-X205L/X210L/X220L AF ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴَﺎ CCD ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻨﺎﺕ LCD ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ W T U MEN E MOD DELETE HOLD DISPLAY DC IN ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ،ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ ﻼ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼً. ﻛﺎﻣ ً ﻳﻔﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ 89/336 CEEﻭ 73/23 CEEﻭ.93/68 CEE ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ. ﻭﺇﻻ ﺳﺘﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻨﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻼﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ. ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ Samsungﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺠﻢ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ. 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:02:21 AD68-00994K VP-X205 00994K AR 001~007.indd 3 AR ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ٨ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ٨ ................................................................................................................................................................................ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ٩ ............................................................................................................................................................................................. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻜﺜﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ٩ .................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ٩ .......................................................................................................................................................................................... ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ١٠ ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ١١ ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ١١ ................................................................................................................................................................................................... LCD ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ١١ ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺎﺭ ١١ ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ١٢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ١٢ ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ١٣ .................................................................................................................................................................................... ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ١٤ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻭﺃﻳﺴﺮ ١٤ ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻭﺳﻔﻠﻲ١٥ .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ١٦ .................................................................................................................................................................................................. ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ١٧ ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... LCD ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ() Movie Play/ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(( ١٧ ........................................................................... ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photo Captureﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ() Photo View/ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(( ١٨ ................................................................... ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ١٩ .................................................................................................................................................(MP3 ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Voice Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ() Voice Play/ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(٢٠ ............................................................................ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ) File Browserﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ() System Settings/ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ((٢١ .................................................................... ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ٢٢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ/ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ٢٢ ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ٢٣ ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ٢٥ .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ٢ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:02:21 VP-X205 00994K AR 001~007.indd 2 AR ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ٢٦ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ٢٦ ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ٢٦ ................................................................................................................................................................................. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ٢٧ ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................MODE ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ٢٨ ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ٢٨ ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ٢٨ ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... MENU ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ٢٩ ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... DISPLAY ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ٢٩ ........................................................................................................................................................................................................DELETE ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ٣٠ .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺳﻌﺘﻪ ٣١ ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ )) (SD/MMCﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ( ٣٣ .......................................................................................................................................................................... ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ/ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )) (SD/MMCﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ( ٣٤ .................................................................................................................................................................. ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movieﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ٣٥ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ٣٦ ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ٣٦ .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ٣٧ .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ٣٨ ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ٣٨ .................................................................................................................................................................................LCD ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ٣٩ ............................................................................................................................................................................................. ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ٤١ ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ٤١ ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ٤٢ .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ٤٣ ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺞ(٤٤ ....................................................................................................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ٤٥ ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. ﺿﺒﻂ ) EISﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ(٤٦ ................................................................................................................................................................................. ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ٤٧ ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ) BLCﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ(٤٨ ................................................................................................................................................................................ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ٤٩ ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ ٣ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:02:21 VP-X205 00994K AR 001~007.indd 3 AR ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ٥٠ ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺧﻞ/ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ٥١ .................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ٥٢ ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ٥٢ ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ٥٣ ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ٥٤ .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ٥٥ ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photoﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ٥٦ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ٥٧ ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ٥٧ .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ٥٨ .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ٥٩ ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ٥٩ ............................................................................................................................................................................... LCD ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ٦٠ ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ٦١ ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ٦١ ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺞ(٦٢ ....................................................................................................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ٦٣ ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻼﺵ٦٤ ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ٦٥ ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ) EISﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ(٦٦ ................................................................................................................................................................................. ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ٦٧ ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ) BLCﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ(٦٨ ................................................................................................................................................................................ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ٦٩ ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ٧٠ ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ٧٠ ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ٧١ .................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) DPOFﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(٧٢ ............................................................................................................................................................... ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ٧٣ ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ٧٤ ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ ٤ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:02:22 VP-X205 00994K AR 001~007.indd 4 AR ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ MP3 ٧٥ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ MP3ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ٧٦ .................................................................................................................................................................................... ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ MP3ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ٧٦ ........................................................................................................................................................................ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ٧٧ ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ٧٧ ......................................................................................................................................................................................................MP3 ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ٧٨ .................................................................................................................................................................................................... MP3 ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ٧٨ .......................................................................................................................................................................................................MP3 ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ٧٩ .................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ ٨٠ ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ٨١ ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... MP3 ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ٨٢ ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ MP3 ﻭﺿﻊ ) Voice Recorderﻣُﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ٨٣ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ٨٤ ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ٨٤ .................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ٨٥ ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ٨٥ .................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ) Voice Playﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ(٨٦ ............................................................................................................................................................................... ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ٨٦ ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ٨٧ ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ٨٨ ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ٨٩ ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ) File Browserﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ( ٩٠ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ٩١ ............................................................................................................................................................................................. ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ٩٢ ............................................................................................................................................................................................... ﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ٩٣ ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ٩٤ ................................................................................................................................................................................................ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ٩٥ .................................................................................................................................................................................................. ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ٩٦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ٩٧ ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ٥ ٩٧ ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:02:22 VP-X205 00994K AR 001~007.indd 5 AR ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ٩٨ .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. USB ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ٩٨ .......................................................................................................................................................................................................USB ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ٩٩ ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ٩٩ .................................................................................................................................................................................................. ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ١٠٠ ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ١٠١ .................................................................................................................................................................................................. ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ١٠٢ ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ LCD ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ١٠٢ ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ١٠٣ ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ/ﻭﻗﺖ ١٠٤ ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ/ﻭﻗﺖ ١٠٤ ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ١٠٥ .................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ١٠٦ ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ/ﻭﻗﺖ ١٠٧ .............................................................................................................................................................................................. ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ١٠٨ ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ١٠٨ ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺪء١٠٩ ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ١١٠ .................................................................................................................................................................................. ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ١١١ ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ١١٢ ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ١١٣ ...................................................................................................................................................................................... ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ١١٤ ............................................................................................................................................................................................. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ١١٥ .........................................................................................................................................................................................................USB ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ١١٥ .............................................................................................................................................................................................. ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ١١٦ ..............................................................................................................................................................................PictBridge ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ١١٧ ........................................................................................................................................................................................... PC Cam ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ٦ ١١٨ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ١١٩ .................................................................................................................................................................................. ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ١١٩ ............................................................................................................................................................. ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ١٢٠ ................................................................................................................................................................................................ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻲ١٢٠ ................................................................................................................................................................ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ١٢١ ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:02:23 VP-X205 00994K AR 001~007.indd 6 AR ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ١٢٢ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ١٢٣ .................................................................................................................................................................................................... USB ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ USBﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ١٢٣ .............................................................................................................................................................................................. ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ١٢٣ ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ١٢٤ ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ١٢٤ .............................................................................................................................................................................. DV Media Pro 1.0 ١٢٥ ............................................................................................................................................................................................Ulead Video Studio ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ١٢٦ ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ١٢٦ ............................................................................................................................................................................USB ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ١٢٧ ............................................................................................................................................................................................. ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ١٢٨ ................................................................................................................................................................................ DVD/ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﻔﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ١٢٩ ...................................................................................................................................................................... ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ١٣٠ ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ١٣٠ ................................................................................................................................................................................................ DPOF ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ١٣١ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ١٣١ ................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ١٣١ .................................................................................................................................................................................. ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﻞ ١٣٢ ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ١٣٢ ....................................................................................................................................................................... ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ١٣٣ .............................................................................................................................................................................................. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺩ ١٣٤ ........................................................................................................................................................................ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ١٣٥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ١٣٥ ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ١٣٧ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ١٣٩ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ١٤١ ٧ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:02:23 VP-X205 00994K AR 001~007.indd 7 AR ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ✤ ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ: ✤ ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ .ﻓﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ. ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﻃﺐ .ﻓﺎﻟﻤﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ. ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ،ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺒﺘﻠﺘﻴﻦ. ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ .ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺿﻮء ﻗﻮﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺼﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ .ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺧﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻃﻔﺎﻝ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺃﻗﺪﺍﻡ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ،ﻓﻴُﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ ﺑﺎﺋﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ Samsungﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ. ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺟﺴﻴﻢ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ. ﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﻣﻠﺴﺎء .ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻣﻠﺴﺎء ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ ﺑﻤﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺧﻔﻴﻒ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ. ّ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ،ﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ،ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ. ﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ .ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﺤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺂﻛﻠﻪ. ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﻄﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﺤﺔّ . ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ،ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺟﺎﻫﺰًﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ٨٥ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ،ﻓﺴﻴﺆﺛﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﻠﺒﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻤﻌﻚ .ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ،ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ )ﻳﺘﻢﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ٥٠ﺇﻟﻰ ٦٠ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ٨٠ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(. ﻳﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ )ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ٢/٣ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(.ﺇﺫﺍ ﺷﻌﺮﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺃﺫﻧﻴﻚ )ﻛﻠﺘﻴﻬﻤﺎ( ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ،ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ. ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺍﺟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺍﺟﺔ ﺑﺨﺎﺭﻳﺔ. ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺤﺎﺩﺙ ﺧﻄﻴﺮ ،ﻋﻼﻭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ. ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ،ﻭﺑﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺓ؛ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ.ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ ،ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺫﺭﺍﻋﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ،ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻤﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺮ. ٨ 8 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:03:06 VP-X205 00994K AR 008~036.indd 8 AR ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ✤ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺷﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ DVDﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ. ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤُﺮﺧﺺ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺿﻌﺔ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻙ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻔًﺎ ﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ. ✤ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻭﺭﺩ ﺫﻛﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﻤﻨﺘﺞ Samsungﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﻳﺘﻪ ﺗﻌﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﺤﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﻴﻦ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻜﺜﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ✤ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺟﺊ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻜﺜﻒ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ: ✤ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻐﺎﺩﺭﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻜﺜﻒ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. ✤ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺜﻒ ،ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺑﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺟﺊ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ .١ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ )ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ٦٠ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ١٤٠ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(. ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ،ﻓﻲ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ. .٢ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﺑﺘﻼﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﻄﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ. ﺳﺘﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﻏﻤﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ٩ 9 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:03:06 VP-X205 00994K AR 008~036.indd 9 AR ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ✤ ✤ ✤ ✤ ✤ ✤ ✤ ✤ ✤ ✤ ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺑﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﻳﺖ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ. ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ،ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ. ﺩﺍﻉ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ) STBYﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ( ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ٥ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ،ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻐﻴﺮ ٍ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ. ﻻ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ. ﻭﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ. ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻻ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ .ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻓﻬﺎ. ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ. ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺑﻮﻟﻴﻤﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ .ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺿ ًﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ً ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ،ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺒﻘﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻬﺎ. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ. ✳ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ،ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ. ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ. ✳ ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. 10 ١٠ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:03:06 VP-X205 00994K AR 008~036.indd 10 AR ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ✤ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻬًﺎ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓً. ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻒ ) CCDﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻨﺎﺕ ،ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCD .١ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCDﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ .ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺧﻀﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ .LCD ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴًﺎ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺠﻠﺔ. ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ً .٢ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCDﺗﺤﺖ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ،ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ. .٣ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ .LCD ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ✤ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ✤ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻷﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻚ ﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺧﻄﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ✤ ﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﻴﻦ. ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺎﺭ ✤ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺷﺮﺍء ﻗﻄﻊ ﻏﻴﺎﺭ ،ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ. ✤ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻏﻴﺎﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ؛ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. 11 ١١ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:03:06 VP-X205 00994K AR 008~036.indd 11 AR ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ● ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ /ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ● ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ( ● ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﺎﺋﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ )(100x ● ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCDﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ T FT ● ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ )(EIS ● ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ● ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ USBﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ● ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﻄﺮﻕ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ ● ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ /ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻫﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ● ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ MP3ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ● ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ● ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﻘﺲ )ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ( ● ﻟﻐﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ● ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻛﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻀ ً ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﻳﺴﺮ. ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ٤٨٠ × ٦٤٠ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ٨٠٠ﺃﻟﻒ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ. ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﺎﺋﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ. 12 ١٢ ﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ. ﺻﻮﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﺻﻌﺔ ﻭﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻀ ً ً ﺗﻤﻨﺤﻚ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCDﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ TFTﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ) ٢٣٠ﺃﻟﻒ ﻟﻮﻥ( ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ. ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺇﺿﻔﺎء ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ. ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ .USB ﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ. ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻛﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﺪﺭﺩﺷﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺆﺗﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ،ﻓﻀ ً ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ( ،ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ. ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ MP3ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ(. ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺄﻏﻨﻴﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ. ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﻘﺲ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ .IP42 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ IP -٤ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻦ ١ﻣﻠﻢ. -٢ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. )ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﺘﺠﻪ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ( ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ١٥ﺩﺭﺟﺔ. ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺃﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ) OSDﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(. ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻛﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﺫﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ/ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ-ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ. ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ. 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:03:06 VP-X205 00994K AR 008~036.indd 12 AR ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ✤ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ .١ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺑﻮﻟﻴﻤﺮ .٢ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ .٣ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ/ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ .٤ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USB .٥ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺘﺎ ﺃﺫﻥ .٦ﺣﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﺪ .٧ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ/ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ .٨ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ .٩ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ .١٠ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ .١١ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻲ .١٢ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ .١٣ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ .١٤ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ .١ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺑﻮﻟﻴﻤﺮ .٢ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ .٥ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺘﺎ ﺃﺫﻥ .٦ .٩ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ .١٠ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ .١٤ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ .١٣ *ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﺣﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ .٣ .٧ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ/ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ/ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ .١١ .٤ .٨ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USB ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ .١٢ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﺪﻯ ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ .Samsung ✤ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ/ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ .Samsung Electronics )(www.samsung.com 13 ١٣ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:03:09 VP-X205 00994K AR 008~036.indd 13 T AR ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ U MEN ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻭﺃﻳﺴﺮ ODE M ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺘﻲ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ W T MENU HOLD DC IN DC IN MODE DELETE DISPLAY HOLD ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺘﻲ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ. E DELET ٧ ٨ ٩ ١٠ ١١ ١٢ Y DISPLA W T ١ U MEN ٢ E MOD ١٣ DELETE HOLD DC IN ١٤ Y DISPLA ٣ ١٥ ٤ ٥ ٦ .١ .٢ .٣ .٤ .٥ .٦ .٧ .٨ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCD ﺯﺭ DELETE ﺯﺭ DISPLAY ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ HOLDﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ /MP3ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ /ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ /ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺯﺭ PLAY .٩ .١٠ .١١ .١٢ .١٣ .١٤ .١٥ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ /ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ][W/T ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ،ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ،ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ،ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ،ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺯﺭ MENU ﺯﺭ MODE ﻗﺎﺑﺲ DC IN ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ [ ✤ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻛﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﺫﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ/ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ-ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ. 14 ١٤ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:03:11 VP-X205 00994K AR 008~036.indd 14 AR ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻭﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ١ ٥ >ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ< ٩ ٢ USB ٦ ٣ .١ .٢ .٣ .٤ .٥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ .٦ﻣﻨﻔﺬ USB .٧ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ .٨ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ .٩ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ .١٠ﺧﻄﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻟﺔ MMC/SD ١٠ ٧ ٨ ٤ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺘﺎﻥ ) ٢ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ( SD MMC 15 ١٥ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:03:12 VP-X205 00994K AR 008~036.indd 15 AR ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ٤ ٩ ٦ ١ ٥ ٢ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺳﻔﻠﻲ ٣ ٨ .١ .٢ .٣ .٤ .٥ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻲ ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ٧ .٦ .٧ .٨ .٩ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ /ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ /ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ /ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺒﻚ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻲ 16 ١٦ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:03:14 VP-X205 00994K AR 008~036.indd 16 Recording... 10X T 10X S T Sepia 12:00AM 2006.01.01 AR STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ :ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCD W 1X W 100-0001 720i 1X F ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ Recording... ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ() Movie Play/ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( 10X ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( ١٢ ١١ ١٠W1X1X W ١٦ 10X 10X T T T ١٧ .١ .٢ .٣ .٤ .٥ .٦ .٧ .٨ .٩ ١٠ .١١ .١٢ .١٣ .١٤ .١٥ .١٦ .١٧ Recording... Recording... ٨ 12:00AM 2006.01.01 720i 720i F ٣ F S Sepia Sepia 12:00AM 12:00AM2006.01.01 2006.01.01 ٧ ٦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ?? ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ERROR ERROR ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ/ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ OK Play Move OK Play Move ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ * 00:00:15/00:05:20 ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ * 00:00:15/00:05:20 720X480 720X576 ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺍﺩ )ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ/ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ( 12:00AM 100-0001 12:00AM2006.01.01 2006.01.01 100-0001 ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ٢ ٣ S OK 00:00:15/00:05:20 ١ ٨ ٧ Move ١٥ 100-0001 ٤ ٥ T Play ١١ ١ 10X 10X 100-0001 100-0001 Sepia ١٥ 1X 1X ٩ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movie Playﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( T ٢ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movie Playﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( S ١٠ ٩ STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY00:00:00/00:40:05 W W ١٣ ١٤ T 10X ? ERROR 720X576 ٢ ١٢ ١٤ ? ERROR Play ٦ .١ .٢ .٣ .٤ .٥ .٦ .٧ .٨ .٩ .١٠ .١١ OK ٥ 00:00:15/00:05:20 Move 100-0001 12:00AM 2006.01.01 ٤ ١١ ١٣ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ 720X576 ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ) Moveﻧﻘﻞ( )ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ( ) Playﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( )ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ( 100-0001ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻒ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ 12:00AM 2006.01.01 ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ( .١٢ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ .١٣ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ /ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ .١٤ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ .١٥ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺍﺩ )ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ/ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺠﻞ( ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ * ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ✤ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ .VP-X205L ✤ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ. 17 ١٧ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:03:17 VP-X205 00994K AR 008~036.indd 17 W 1X W 1X Capturing... T 10X 10X T AR Sepia ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ :ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCD 12:00AM 2006.01.01 100-0001 W W ) Photoﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photo Captureﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(View/ 1 1X 1X Capturing... ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photo Captureﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( T 10X ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photo Viewﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( 10X T ١٠ ٩ W WW 1X 1X 1X 10X 10X10X T T ٦ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ١ ٧ ٦ View 12:00AM 2006.01.01 ١١ ١٠ 100-0001 ٣ Capturing... Capturing... ٢ ٣ 1 Move OK ١٠ ١٣ 100-0001 Slide ٢ ١١ 1 10X T ١٥ .١ .٢ .٣ .٤ .٥ .٦ .٧ .٨ .٩ .١٠ .١١ .١٢ .١٣ .١٤ .١٥ 1X ٧ ١٤ T W ٨ ١١ ١٣ ١٢ ١ ٢ ٩Sepia ٨ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photo Viewﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( Sepia Sepia ٥ View 12:00AM 2006.01.01 12:00AM 2006.01.01 100-0001 100-0001 ٥ ٤ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ 1 1 ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ/ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ OK MoveMove OK View iew ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓVﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ * ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ * ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲSlideSlide ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ 100-0001 100-0001 ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ 1 1 ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ 12:00AM 2006.01.01 12:00AM 2006.01.01 ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ .١ .٢ .٣ .٤ .٥ .٦ .٧ .٨ .٩ .١٠ .١١ 100-0001 OK Move 12:00AM 2006.01.01 ٤ Slide ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ 1 ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ) Moveﻧﻘﻞ( )ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ( ) Viewﻋﺮﺽ( )ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ( ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ 12:00AM 2006.01.01 ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ( ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ) DPOFﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ( ١٢ .١٢ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ/ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ .١٣ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻖ ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ * ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ✤ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ. 18 ١٨ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:03:20 VP-X205 00994K AR 008~036.indd 18 AR ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ :ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCD 00:12 Life is cool.mp3 Everytime.mp3 Toxic.mp3 Don't push me.mp3 Love you.mp3 ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ (MP3 ﻭﺿﻊ MP3 ﻭﺿﻊ MP3 ٨ ٧ Play ٩ ١٠ ١ 00:12 Life is cool.mp3 Everytime.mp3 Toxic.mp3 Don't push me.mp3 Love you.mp3 ٦ Play ٥ .١ .٢ .٣ .٤ .٥ .٦ .٧ .٨ .٩ .١٠ .١١ OK ٢ ٣ ١٢ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ Stereo 44.1KHz 192Kbps ) Moveﻧﻘﻞ( )ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ( 00:01:07/00:03:27 ) Playﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( )ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ( OKﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ Search Pause List ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺍﺩ )ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ( ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ Life is cool.mp3 Sweetbox POP 00:01:07/00:03:27 ١٠ .١١ .١٢ .١٣ .١٤ .١٥ .١٦ ١ Stereo 44.1KHz 192Kbps Pause ٤ Life is cool.mp3 Sweetbox ١٦ ١١ .١ .٢ .٣ .٤ .٥ .٦ .٧ .٨ .٩ .١٠ OK 1/10 ١٣ Move 1/10 POP ١٥ ١٤ Move OK Search List ٩ ٨ ٧ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ /ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ) Searchﺑﺤﺚ( )ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ( ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺍﺩ )ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ/ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ( ) Listﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ( )ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ( ) Play/Pauseﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ( )ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ( ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ/ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ( ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ✤ ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ MP3ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ. ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ MP3ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ،ﻓﺘﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺧﺎﻟﻴًﺎ. 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:03:22 ٢ ٣ ٤ ٥ ٦ 19 ١٩ VP-X205 00994K AR 008~036.indd 19 SWAV0001.WAV 2006/01/01 12:00:00 AM Stereo 8.0KHz 64Kbps 00:00:12/34:59:48 AR Stop ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ :ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCD 1/3 00:12 1 2006/01/01 12:00:00 AM SWAV0001.WAV )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ) Voiceﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(Voice Play/ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ Record 2006/01/01 12:00:00 AM 2006/01/01 12:00:10 AM Stereo 8.0KHz 64Kbps ﻭﺿﻊ ) Voice Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ٧ 00:00:12/34:59:48ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﻭﺿﻊ ) Voice Playﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ٨ ٧ ١ SWAV0001.WAV 2006/01/01 12:00:00 AM Stereo 8.0KHz 64Kbps 00:00:12/34:59:48 ٢ ٣ ٤ ٥ ٦ ٩ ١٠ 1/3 00:12 ٨ ٦ 1/3 .١ .٢ .٣ .٤ .٥ .٦ .٧ .٨ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ/ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ OK Play Move ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ( ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ /ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ 1/3 1 ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ SWAV0001.WAV ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ2006/01/01 12:00:00 AM 2006/01/01 12:00:10 AMﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ/ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ2006/01/01 12:00:20 AM ٣ Stereo 8.0KHz 64Kbps 00:00:02/00:00:12 Pause OK List 1/3 Search .١٠ .١١ .١٢ 1 2006/01/01 12:00:10 AM 2006/01/01 12:00:20 AM 1 ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ 2006/01/01 12:00:00 AM ١١ ١ 2006/01/01 12:00:00 AM Play .١ .٢ .٣ .٤ .٥ .٦ .٧ .٨ .٩ Stop ٥ OK 1/3 ١٠ ٩ Move 1 ٨ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ Stereo 8.0KHz 64Kbps ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ 00:00:02/00:00:12 ) Moveﻧﻘﻞ( )ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ( ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ( )ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( Play OK Pause Search List ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ/ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ( ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺍﺩ )ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ( ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ .١ .٢ .٣ .٤ .٥ .٦ .٧ .٨ .٩ .١٠ .١١ OK Move 1 SWAV0001.WAV 2006/01/01 12:00:00 AM ١ ٢ 00:00:02/00:00:12 ٣ ٤ Stereo 8.0KHz 64Kbps Pause ٤ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ SWAV0001.WAV 2006/01/01 12:00:00 AM ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ/ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ Play ١١ ٢ Stop 00:12 2006/01/01 12:00:20 AM ﻭﺿﻊ ) Voice Playﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( List OK ٧ ٦ Search ٥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ/ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ) Searchﺑﺤﺚ( )ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ( ) Listﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ( )ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ( ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺍﺩ )ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ/ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺠﻞ( ) Play/Pause/Stopﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ/ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( )ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ( ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ/ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ( ]ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ[ ✤ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. 20 ٢٠ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:03:24 VP-X205 00994K AR 008~036.indd 20 DCAM0002.JPG DCAM0003.JPG DCAM0004.JPG Play Play OK OK Move AR ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ :ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCD Coin Dart ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ) File Browserﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ() System Settings/ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(( ﻭﺿﻊ ) File Browserﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ( ٩ ١١ ١٠ ٦ ٨ Play Play OK OK ٣ ٤ ٥ Select ٦ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ OKﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ( ) Moveﻧﻘﻞ( Move Play ) Playﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( )ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ( ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ System Settings ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ/ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ( TYPE OK ٥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲCoin ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ Dart Internal External ٣ Storage Type Move ٧ Ver. ٢ TYPE ٢ /DCIM/100SSDVC DCAM0001.JPG DCAM0002.JPG DCAM0003.JPG DCAM0004.JPG ٧ ١ System Settings ١ 1/4 .١ .٢ .٣ .٤ .٥ .٦ .٧ .٨ .٩ .١٠ .١١ Play OK Move ﻭﺿﻊ ) System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( .١ .٢ .٣ .٤ .٥ .٦ .٧ Move ٤ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ) Moveﻧﻘﻞ( )ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ( ) Selectﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ( )ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ( ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ Ver. Storage Type Internal External Select OK Move 21 ٢١ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:03:26 VP-X205 00994K AR 008~036.indd 21 AR ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ/ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ. ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ. ﱢ >ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ< ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ >ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ< ١ ﺍﺟﺬﺏ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ. ٢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ١٢٠٠) SB-P120Aﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ( ١٩٠٠) SB-P190Aﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ( ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ. ✤ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﺎ ،ﻓﺄﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ. 22 ٢٢ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:03:26 VP-X205 00994K AR 008~036.indd 22 AR ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ✤ ✤ ✤ ✤ ✤ ✤ ✤ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ٣٢ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ) ٠ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ( ﻭ ١٠٤ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ) ٤٠ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ(. ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻄﻠﻘًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ٣٢ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ) ٠ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ(. ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻭﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ٣٢ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ )ﺻﻔﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ١٠٤ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ) ٤٠ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ( ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ. ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻬﺐ(. ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺨﻴﻨﻬﺎ. ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﺮ ﻟﻄﺮﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺐ ) (+ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ ) .(-ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ. ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ Samsungﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺑﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﻳﺖ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻏﻠﻘﺖ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ،LCDﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ. ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ .ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ. ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ١٢٠٠) SB-P120Aﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ( ١٩٠٠) SB-P190Aﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ( ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ LCDﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭ ٤٠ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭ ٢٠ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﺎﻥ ﻭ ٥٠ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﺎﻥ ﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ] ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ [ ✤ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ. ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﺟﻬﺰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﻠﻖ. ✤ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ Samsungﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ. ✤ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ،ﺗﻘﻞ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ. ✤ ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ "ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ" ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴًﺎ ﻭﻳﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ. 23 ٢٣ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:03:27 VP-X205 00994K AR 008~036.indd 23 AR ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ. ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ٢٠ﺇﻟﻰ ٪٤٠ﻣُﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ٤٠ﺇﻟﻰ ٪٦٠ﻣُﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ٦٠ﺇﻟﻰ ٪٨٠ﻣُﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ٨٠ﺇﻟﻰ ٪٩٥ﻣُﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ )ﻳﻮﻣﺾ( ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ. )ﻳﻮﻣﺾ( ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ. ٍ ٥ - STBY 00:00:00:00:40:05 720i F Recording... S Sepia - 12:00AM 2006/01/01 ""Low battery )"ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ"( ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ،ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ. ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ،ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ. ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ. ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ DC IN ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ١٢٠٠) SB-P120Aﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ( ١٩٠٠) SB-P190Aﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭ ٥٠ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ٣ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ ٢٠ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USB ﺛﻼﺙ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ ٤٠ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ٦ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ ٢٠ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ .USB ✤ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USBﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ✤ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USBﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ. 24 ٢٤ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:03:29 VP-X205 00994K AR 008~036.indd 24 AR ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ .١ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[. ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ .٢ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ. .٣ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ. .٤ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ .USB ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USB ﺻﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ. ﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USBﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ USBﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ. ﻣﻘﺒﺲ DC IN ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USB ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ [ ✤ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺪ ﻃﺎﻗﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ. ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻘﺔ ،ﺣﻴﺜﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ً USB USB MMC/SD USB MMC/SD USB MMC/SD ﻣﻨﻔﺬ USB MMC/SD USB ] ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ [ ✤ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ. ✤ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ٣٢ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﻭ ١٠٤ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ. ✤ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ،ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻼ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ،ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻭﻗﺘًﺎ ﻃﻮﻳ ً ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ. ✤ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ،ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ. MMC/SD 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:03:31 25 ٢٥ VP-X205 00994K AR 008~036.indd 25 AR ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ. ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ >ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movie recorderﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( ﻭ) Voice recorderﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(< ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ - ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ DC IN ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ،ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ .ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ. .١ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ. ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ٣٤ .٢ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓً. ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ٢٥ .٣ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. .٤ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE .٥ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [Record / Stopﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ/ﺻﻮﺕ. .٦ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. 26 ٢٦ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:03:32 VP-X205 00994K AR 008~036.indd 26 Photo Movie AR Movie ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ MODE MP3 Photo Photo )ﻓﻴﻠﻢ( ،ﻭ) Photoﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ،ﻭ MP3ﻭVoice Recorder ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ Modeﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ .ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻫﻲ Movie )ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ،ﻭ) File Browserﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ( ،ﻭ) System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(. ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Voice Recorder MP3 ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. MP3 ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ Movie Movie Movie Photo Photo Photo MP3 MP3 File Browser ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movieﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ. Voice Recorder Voice Recorder ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photoﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ. File Browser ﻭﺿﻊ ) VOICE Recorderﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ. ﻭﺿﻊ ) File Browserﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ( ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﻗﻔﻠﻪ ﻭﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ. File Browser ﻭﺿﻊ Mp3 ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ .mp3 System Settings MP3 ﻭﺿﻊ ) System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ/ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCDﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ/ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ. ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ Voice Recorder Voice Recorder ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺩﺍﻉ. ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCDﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﻘﻀﺎء ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ( ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ System Settings Voice Recorder .LCD ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ System Settings ) Fileﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ) Photoﺻﻮﺭﺓ( Movie ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Browser File Browser ٣ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ File١٠ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ Browser MP3 ٣٠ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ) Voiceﺻﻮﺕ( ) File Browserﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ( ٣٠ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ٣٠ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ) System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( USB ٦٠ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ٦٠ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ 27 ٢٧ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:03:33 VP-X205 00994K AR 008~036.indd 27 AR ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ) ▲( ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Multi-Playﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ(/ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )▼( ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ - ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ) Record/Captureﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ( ﺇﻟﻰ ) Play/Viewﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﻋﺮﺽ( ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ) Play/Viewﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﻋﺮﺽ( ﺇﻟﻰ ) Record/Captureﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ( ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ✤ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. .١ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ /ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. .٢ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ /ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. ◆ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ( ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movieﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ) Voice Recorder / MP3 /ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( .٣ﺃﻛﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ MENU 28 ٢٨ .١ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE .٢ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MENU .٣ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ /ﻷﺳﻔﻞ /ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ /ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ. .٤ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [Menuﻟﻺﻧﻬﺎء. 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:03:34 VP-X205 00994K AR 008~036.indd 28 AR ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ DISPLAY ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [DISPLAYﺗﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ. .١ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ .LCD .٢ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ. ◆ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movieﻓﻴﻠﻢ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ) System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(. W .٣ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[DISPLAY ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [DISPLAYﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movieﻓﻴﻠﻢ( ﻭ) Photoﺻﻮﺭﺓ( T ✤ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ :ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ✤ ﻣﺮﺗﺎﻥ :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ. ✤ ٣ﻣﺮﺍﺕ :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻭّﻟﻴﺔ. ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ [ ✤ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ) Movieﻓﻴﻠﻢ( ﻭ) Photoﺻﻮﺭﺓ(. U MEN E ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ١٠٩ MOD E DELET HOLD Y DISPLA DC IN ﺯﺭ ﺯﺭ DISPLAY DELETE ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [DISPLAYﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ 100-0001 ✤ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ. ✤ ﻣﺮﺗﺎﻥ :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻭّﻟﻴﺔ. ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ [ ✤ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Voice Recorder ،MP3ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(، ) File Browserﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ() System Settings ،ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(. Play Move ? ERROR OK ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ DELETE ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ] [DELETEﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ. ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ > :<OKﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. >) <Multi Selectﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ( :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ. >) <Allﻛﻞ( :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ. >) <Cancelﺍﻟﻐﺎء( :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ. 100-0003 OK Multi Select All Cancel ? ERROR Select OK Move 29 ٢٩ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:03:39 VP-X205 00994K AR 008~036.indd 29 AR ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ٣٣ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ. ✤ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ✤ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ٩٫٩٩٩ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭ ٩٩٩ﻣﺠﻠﺪًﺍ. ✤ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ًء ﻣﻦ DCAM0001ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ. ✤ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ًء ﻣﻦ 100SSDVCﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ. ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ✤ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )(DCF ✤ :DCAM✽✽✽✽.JPGﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ :SMOV✽✽✽✽.AVIﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ :SWAV✽✽✽✽.WAVﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ :✽✽✽✽✽✽✽✽.MP3ﻣﻠﻒ MP3 ✤ :MISCﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ .DPOF ✤ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ) MUSICﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ( ﺑﺤﺮﻳﺔ ﺗﺎﻣﺔ. ✤ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ. ] ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ [ ✤ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ. ✤ ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ. ✤ ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ. ✤ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ .ﻓﻬﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ .ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺗﻮﺧﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ. ✤ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻔﺔ ،ﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ SAMSUNGﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻘﻮﺩﺓ .ﻟﺬﺍ ،ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ. ﻣﻠﻒMP3 ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ 30 ٣٠ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:03:40 VP-X205 00994K AR 008~036.indd 30 AR ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺳﻌﺘﻪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ) Super Fineﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ( 352p 720i/720p ٢١ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ١٤ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ) Fineﺟﻴﺪﺓ( 720i/720p 352p ٢١ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ٣٢ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ) Normalﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ( 352p 720i/720p ٣٢ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ٦٥ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ١ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ )(VP-X210L ٤٣ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ٢٩ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ٦٥ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ٤٣ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ١٣١ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ٦٥ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ٢ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ )(VP-X220L ٨٦ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ٥٨ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ١٣٠ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ٨٦ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ٢٦٢ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ١٣٠ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ٣٢ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ٢٠ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ٥٠ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ٢٠ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ٤ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ) Mediaﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ( ) Capacityﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ( Internal Memory )ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ( ٥١٢ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ )(VP-X205L SD/MMC ٦٤ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ٣ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ٤ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ٣ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ٧ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ٤ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ١٢٨ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ٤ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ٣ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ٧ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ٤ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ١٧ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ٧ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ٢٥٦ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ١١ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ٧ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ١٧ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ١١ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ٣٢ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ١٧ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ٥١٢ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ٢١ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ١٤ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ٣٢ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ٢١ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ٦٥ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ٣٢ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ١ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ٤٣ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ٢٩ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ٦٥ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ٤٣ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ١٣١ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ٦٥ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ٢ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ٨٦ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ٥٨ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ١٣٠ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ٨٦ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ٢٦٢ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ١٣٠ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺳﻌﺘﻪ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ. ✤ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ. ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ. ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺳﻌﺔ ٍ ✤ ﻭﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺠﻠﺔ .ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺳﻌﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ') 'Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. ✤ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺘﻬﺎ ٢ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻓﺄﻗﻞ .ﻟﺬﺍ ،ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ٢ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ. ✤ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ) Normalﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ( ) (٣٥٢/٧٢٠ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻜﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ. ✤ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ )ﻗﺴﻢ( ﺗﺎﻟﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ. 31 ٣١ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:03:41 VP-X205 00994K AR 008~036.indd 31 AR ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ MP3ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ) Qualityﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ( ) Capacityﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ( ) Mediaﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ( ٤٨٠x٦٤٠ ٢٨٧٥ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ٥١٢ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ )(VP-X205L Internal Memory ٥٧٥٤ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ١ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ )(VP-X210L ١١٥١١ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ( ٢ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ )(VP-X220L ١٧٧ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ٣٢ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ٣٥٧ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ٦٤ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ٧١٦ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ١٢٨ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ١٤٣٦ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ SD/MMC ٢٥٦ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ٢٨٧٥ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ٥١٢ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ٥٧٥٤ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ١ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ١١٥١١ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ٢ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ) Mediaﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ( ) Capacityﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ( ) Timeﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( Internal Memory ٥١٢ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ )(VP-X205L ١٧ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ١ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ )(VP-X210L ٢ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ )(VP-X220L ٣٢ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ٦٤ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ١٢٨ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ٢٥٦ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ٥١٢ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ١ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ٢ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ٣٥ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ٧٠ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ﺳﺎﻋﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ٤ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ٨ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ١٧ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ٣٥ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ٧٠ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. )ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ( SD/MMC ) Mediaﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ( ) Capacityﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ( Internal Memory ٥١٢ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ )(VP-X205L )ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ( SD/MMC ١ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ )(VP-X210L ٢ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ )(VP-X220L ٣٢ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ٦٤ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ١٢٨ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ٢٥٦ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ٥١٢ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ١ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ٢ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ MP3 ١٢٨ﻣﻠﻔﺎً ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ٢٥٦ﻣﻠﻔًﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ٥١٢ﻣﻠﻔًﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ٨ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ١٦ﻣﻠﻔًﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ٣٢ﻣﻠﻔًﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ٦٤ﻣﻠﻔًﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ١٢٨ﻣﻠﻔًﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ٢٥٦ﻣﻠﻔًﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ٥١٢ﻣﻠﻔًﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ MP3ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ١٢٨ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ/ﺣﺠﻢ ٤ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ✤ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ. ✤ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ .ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ١٠٠ ✤ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ. ✤ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ،ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ. ✤ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ. ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ . ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺳﻌﺔ ٍ ✤ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ،ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻊ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ >Low speed card. Please record at lower ﺳﺠﻞ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ( .ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﻂء ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ) <qualityﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ .ﱢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ .ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ١٫٢٥ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ/ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ. 32 ٣٢ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:03:41 VP-X205 00994K AR 008~036.indd 32 AR ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )) (SD/MMCﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ( ✤ ✤ ✤ ✤ ✤ ✤ ✤ ✤ ✤ ✤ ✤ ✤ ✤ ✤ ✤ ✤ ✤ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ Samsungﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺴﻮء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ. ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ/ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ. ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ/ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ .ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻟﺔ. ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ. ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧًﺎ .ﻟﺬﺍ ،ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ﻻ ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻬﻴﺄﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ً ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ. ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ .ﻟﺬﺍ ،ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ،ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ. ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺜﻨﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ. ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﺒﺔ. ﻻ ﺗﺪﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ .ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻣﻠﺴﺎء ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺇﻥ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ. ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺨﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ .ﻭﻻ ﻳﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻴﺒًﺎ ﺑﻬﺎ ،ﺑﻞ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ. ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻔﺔ ،ﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ SAMSUNGﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻘﻮﺩﺓ .ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ. ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ SDﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ RS-MMC/ﻓﻲ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ. ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ SDﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ RS-MMC/ﻓﻲ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ .ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ. ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ .ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ SDﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ/ RS-MMCﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ .ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ><SD/MMC 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:03:41 33 ٣٣ VP-X205 00994K AR 008~036.indd 33 AR ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ/ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ )) (SD/MMCﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ( ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ .١ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ. SD Memory Card MMC/SD .٣ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ. USB .٢ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺗًﺎ ﺧﻔﻴﻔًﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ. ﺟﺰء ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ USB STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ :ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ. ◆ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ > ،<OKﻓﺴﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ') 'Externalﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ( ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ >) <Cancelﺍﻟﻐﺎء( ،ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ. ◆ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ ،ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ] [ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ. S STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 OK Cancel S S USB .٢ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻴﺌًﺎ ﻳﺴﻴﺮًﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ. OK Cancel MMC/SD .١ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ. External memory inserted. Do you want to change ?memory to external F USB ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ F STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 720i SD Memory Card External memory inserted. Do you want to change ?memory to external 720i MMC/SD OK Cancel F SD Memory Card External memory inserted. Do you want to change ?memory to external 720i MMC/SD SD Memory Card .٣ﺍﺟﺬﺏ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ. 34 ٣٤ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:03:43 VP-X205 00994K AR 008~036.indd 34 AR ١ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movieﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]Wﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ T U MEN ﺯﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ E MOD E HOLD DC IN .٢ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ Movie Record )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. STBY 00:00:00:00:40:05 720i F Recording... S Sepia DELET DISPLAY ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movieﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ٣٦ ................................................................................................ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ٣٦ ......................................................................................... ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ٣٧ .............................................................................. ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ٣٨ ................................................................................................ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ٣٨ ..................................................... LCD ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ٣٩ ................................................................. ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ٤١ ............................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ٤١ ............................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ٤٢ ............................................................................. ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ٤٣ ......................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺞ( ٤٤ ........................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ٤٥ ..................................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ) EISﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ( ٤٦ ..................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ٤٧ .................................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ) BLCﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ( ٤٨ .................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ٤٩ ............................................................................. ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ٥٠ .......................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺧﻞ/ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ٥١ ........................................................................ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ٥٢ ................................................................................ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ٥٢ ............................................................................ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ٥٣ ........................................................................... ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ٥٤ .............................................................................. ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ٥٥ ............................................................................. 12:00AM 2006/01/01 ◆ ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ/ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻓﻘﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻌﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. 35 ٣٥ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:03:45 VP-X205 00994K AR 008~036.indd 35 AR ) Movie Modeﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( :ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ. ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺤﺔ ١١٩ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ. .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. ◆ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movieﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ System Settings )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( .ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ١٠٩ STBY 00:00:00:00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00:00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00:00:40:05 ١ Recording... Recording... Recording... .٢ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ. ◆ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ] ● [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ .LCD ◆ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻭﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ. ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ. .٣ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻣﺮﺓ STBY 00:00:00:00:40:05 ◆ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ. Sepia Sepia Sepia .٤ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ. 720i S S S Recording... Recording... Recording... F Recording... ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ. ◆ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ S ◆ 2006/01/01 12:00AM Sepia ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ Sepia Sepia Sepia ٣ 720i F F F 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 12:00AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 Recording... Recording... Recording... Sepia Sepia Sepia 720i 720i 720iF S S S STBY 00:00:02:00:40:03 STBY 00:00:02:00:40:03 STBY 00:00:02:00:40:03 00:00:02:00:40:03 F F F 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 12:00AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 00:00:02:00:40:03 00:00:02:00:40:03 00:00:02:00:40:03 ٢ 720i 720i 720i 720i 720i 720i F F F S S S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 12:00AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ Recording... ✤ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) Auto Shut Offﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ٥ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ. ✤ ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺩﺍﻉ. ✤ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ،LCDﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ >) <LCD Brightnessﺳﻄﻮﻉ( ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ) System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( .ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ١٠٢ S ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ. ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ Sepiaﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCDﻋﻠﻰ ✤ ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ 2006/01/01 12:00AM ✤ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻏﻠﻖ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ LCDﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ ،ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻠﻪ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﻌﻴﺔ ،ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻌﻒ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺻﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺎ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ. ً ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺎ .ﻟﺬﺍ ،ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ً STBY 00:00:02:00:40:03 36 ٣٦ 720i F 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:03:47 Recording... VP-X205 00994K AR 008~036.indd 36 AR ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movieﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( :ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ. ﻭﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻲ .10x 00:00:00/00:40:05 W .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. 720i 1X F ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movieﻓﻴﻠﻢ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ) System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(➥ .ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ١٠٩ T W 10X 00:00:00/00:40:05 720i 1X SF .٢ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ. ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ W T 10X 1X 720i F ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [W/Tﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ. 12:00AM 2006/01/01 00:00:00/00:40:05 Sepia S Sepia ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ،ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ. ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ/ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ،LCDﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ .W ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ(. T W 10X 720i S 1X Sepia T W 12:00AM 2006/01/01 00:00:02/00:40:03 10X F 12:00AM 2006/01/01 00:00:02/00:40:03 720i 1X SF 12:00AM 2006/01/01 00:00:02/00:40:03 Sepia ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [W/Tﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ. W T 10X 1X ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ،ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻨﻪ. ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ/ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ،ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ .T ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻫﻲ .10x F S Sepia 10X T W W T ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ 12:00AM 2006/01/01 00:00:04/00:40:01 1X Sepia ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ. ✤ ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ. ✤ ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ٤٩ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ. 720i 10X 1X S 720i 12:00AM 2006/01/01 F 00:00:04/00:40:01 720i SF 12:00AM 2006/01/01 00:00:04/00:40:01 Sepia W T 10X 1X 720i F S Sepia T 10X 12:00AM 2006/01/01 ٣٧ ٣٧ S Sepia 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:04:10 12:00AM 2006/01/01 VP-X205 00994K AR 037~057.indd 37 AR ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movieﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( :ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCD ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ .LCD .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ١ STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 720i ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. F Recording... .٢ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [PLAYﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. S Sepia ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movie Playﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. ٢ 12:00AM 2006/01/01 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 00:00:00/00:05:20 ﺯﺭ ][ PLAY .٣ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ /ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ. Recording... Recording... ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ/ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ. .٤ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [PLAYﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ. ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [PLAYﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺆﻗﺘًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ. 720i 720i 00:00:00/00:40:05 720X576 F F Recording... Sepia Sepia Sepia 100-0001 ٣ S S 2006/01/01 00:00:00/00:05:20 12:00AM 12:00AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 00:00:00/00:05:20 00:00:00/00:05:20 00:00:15/00:16:15 100-0001 720X576 720X576 720X576 00:00:15/00:16:15 100-0004 ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ،ﺣﺮﻙ ] [Joystickﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ/ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ✤ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻪ ،ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ >) <No Files...ﻻ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ.(... ٤ 100-0001 100-0001 100-0004 12:00AM 2006/01/01 00:00:15/00:16:15 00:00:15/00:16:15 100-0004 100-0004 720X576 720X576 12:00AM 12:00AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 ٣٨ ٣٨ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:04:13 VP-X205 00994K AR 037~057.indd 38 2006/01/01 AR ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movieﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( :ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [W/Tﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movie Playﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ .LCD ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 ١ Recording... .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ /ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ. F S Sepia .٢ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [PLAYﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [ W/Tﺇﻟﻰ W )ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ(. F F Recording... Recording... Recording... ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. 720i 720i F 720i 720i 12:00AM 2006/01/01 S S S Sepia 12:00AM 2006/01/01 Sepia 12:00AM Sepia 12:00AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 00:00:00/00:05:20 ٢ 720X576 00:00:00/00:05:20 00:00:00/00:05:20 00:00:00/00:05:20 720X576 720X576 720X576 .٣ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ /ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ /ﻷﻋﻠﻰ /ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ. 100-0001 .٤ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [PLAYﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ. ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [PLAYﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺆﻗﺘًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ. 100-0001 100-0001 100-0001 100-0001 ٣ 100-0001 100-0001 100-0001 ? ?? ERROR ? ERROR ERROR ERROR ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻪ ،ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ >) <No Files...ﻻ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ.(... ✤ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺘﻲ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ/ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ، ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ. 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:04:16 ٤ Play OK Move OK OK OK Move Move Move Play Play Play 00:00:05/00:05:20 720X576 00:00:05/00:05:20 00:00:05/00:05:20 00:00:05/00:05:20 720X576 720X576 720X576 100-0001 12:00AM 2006/01/01 100-0001 100-0001 100-0001 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 12:00AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 ٣٩ ٣٩ VP-X205 00994K AR 037~057.indd 39 AR ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movieﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( :ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺯﺭ ] [PLAYﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ :ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﺆﻗﺘًﺎ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] :[Wﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ. ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ([ :ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movie Playﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( :ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) RPSﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ(. )ﻣﻌﺪﻝ (128x 64x 32x 16x 8x 4x 2x :RPS ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ([ :ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movie Playﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( :ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) FPSﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ(. )ﻣﻌﺪﻝ (128x 64x 32x 16x 8x 4x 2x :FPS ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movie Playﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( :ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ. ➝ ➝ ١ ➝ ➝ ➝ ➝ ➝ ➝ ➝ ➝ ➝ ➝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [PLAYﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movie Playﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. .٢ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ. ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ،ﻳﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ. ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ. .٣ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺨﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ. 00:00:00/00:05:20 00:00:00/00:05:20 720X576 100-0001 100-0001 ٣ 720X576 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 00:00:05/00:05:15 00:00:05/00:05:15 720X576 720X576 ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺿﺎ. ً ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ،ﻳﻘﻞ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ. ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ١٠ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ. ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ➥ .ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ١٢٧ ✤ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً ✤ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﻔﻚ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ CODECﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ،ﻓﺎﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ) Download Centreﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ( ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ Samsung Electronics ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ➥ .CODECﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ١٢٤ 100-0001 100-0001 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 ٤٠ ٤٠ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:04:18 VP-X205 00994K AR 037~057.indd 40 AR ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movieﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ .ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ. .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 ١ Recording... Recording... Recording... Recording... ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. .٢ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MENU ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ /ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Sizeﺣﺠﻢ(. .٣ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. 720iF 720i 720i F F F S Sepia Sepia Sepia Sepia ٢ AE AE AE AE ﻭﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ<٢٨٨X٣٥٢>/<٥٧٦x٧٢٠> : .٤ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [MENUﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. Exit Exit Exit Exit ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. MENU MENU MENU MENU ٣ S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 S S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 Movie Movie Movie Movie Size Size 720 720x576 Size Size 720 720x576 352 352x288 720 720x576 720 720x576 352 352x288 352 352x288 352 352x288 Select Select Select Select OK OK OK OK AE AE AE AE ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ > <TVﻓﻲ >) <Record Modeﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ 720iﻓﻘﻂ. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ > <PCﻓﻲ >) <Record Modeﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ 720pﺃﻭ .352p ✤ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ➥ .ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ .٣١ ✤ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ،ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ. ✤ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ،(٢٨٨x٣٥٢)٣٥٢ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ (٥٧٦x٧٢٠)٧٢٠ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ✤ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ Movie Record )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. 720i 720 720 352 720 720 352 352 352 Exit Exit Exit Exit MENU ٤ MENU MENU MENU Select Select Select Select Move Move Move Move Movie Movie Movie Movie Size Size 720x576 Size Size 720x576 352x288 720x576 720x576 352x288 352x288 352x288 OK OK OK OK Move Move Move Move STBY 00:00:00/01:00:07 STBY 00:00:00/01:00:07 STBY 00:00:00/01:00:07 STBY 00:00:00/01:00:07 Recording... Recording... Recording... Recording... 352p 352pF 352p 352p F F F S Sepia Sepia Sepia Sepia 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:04:20 S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 S S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 12:00AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 ٤١ ٤١ VP-X205 00994K AR 037~057.indd 41 AR ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ:( )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮMovie ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ 720i 720iF 720i 720i . ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ.ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 ١ Recording... Recording... Recording... Recording... F F F .ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ/ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ.١ .( )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢMovie Record ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ S S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 SS 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 12:00AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 Movie Movie AE Movie Movie Quality AE AE AE Quality Super Fine SF Quality Quality SFF Fine Super Fine SF Super Super Fine Fine SFFN Normal F Fine F Fine Fine N N Normal N Normal Normal OK Select Move Move Move Move OK OK OK Select Select Select Movie Movie AE Movie Movie Quality AE AE AE Quality Super Fine SF Quality Quality SFF Fine SF Super Fine SF Super Super Fine Fine FN Normal F Fine F Fine Fine N N Normal N Normal Normal OK Select Move Move Move Move 720i SF 720i 720i 720i SF SF SF OK OK OK Select Select Select Sepia Sepia Sepia Sepia .[MENU] ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ.٢ .(< )ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓQuality> ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ/ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ٢ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ،ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ/ ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ.٣ .[ﺯﺭ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ MENU Exit MENU MENU MENU Exit Exit Exit (< )ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔNormal>/(< )ﺟﻴﺪﺓFine>/(< )ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔSuper Fine> : ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ٣ .[ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔMENU] ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ.٤ . ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ MENU Exit MENU MENU MENU Exit Exit Exit ٤ STBY 00:00:00/00:26:43 00:00:00/00:26:43 STBY STBY 00:00:00/00:26:43 STBY 00:00:00/00:26:43 [ ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ .٣١ ➥ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ.✤ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ Movie Record ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ/ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ،✤ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .()ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ Recording... Recording... Recording... Recording... S S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 SS 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 12:00AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 Sepia Sepia Sepia Sepia VP-X205 00994K AR 037~057.indd 42 ٤٢ ٤٢ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:04:23 AR ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movieﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺃﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ. ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ. .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 ١ Recording... Recording... Recording... Recording... ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. Sepia Sepia Sepia Sepia ٢ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ) Customﻣﺨﺼﺺ( ،ﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء )ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ(، ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻸ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCDﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ. ﻭﺳﺘﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ) Customﻣﺨﺼﺺ( ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ. ) Autoﺁﻟﻲ( ) Daylightﻧﻬﺎﺭ( ) Fluorescentﻓﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ( ) Tungstenﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ( ) Customﻣﺨﺼﺺ( Exit Exit Exit Exit ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ. ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ/ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﻠﻖ. ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻤﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻭﺳﻨﺖ. MENU MENU MENU ٣ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ. .٤ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [MENUﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﻠﻖ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ ،ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ >) <Autoﺁﻟﻲ( ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ. ✤ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ،ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ. ✤ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ >) <Customﻣﺨﺼﺺ( ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ .ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ، ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ. ✤ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ Movie Record )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:04:26 MENU ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻤﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﻫﺠﺔ. ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Autoﺁﻟﻲ( ،ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ. 720i F 720i 720i F F F S .٢ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MENU ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ /ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <White Balanceﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(. .٣ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. 720i Exit Exit Exit Exit ٤ MENU MENU MENU MENU S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 S S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 12:00AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 Movie Movie AE Movie Movie White BalanceAE AE White BalanceAAE White Auto White Balance Balance A Daylight Auto A Auto A Auto Fluorescent Daylight Daylight Daylight Fluorescent Fluorescent FluorescentOK Select Select Select Select OK OK OK Move Move Move Move Movie Movie AE Movie Movie White Balance AE AE White BalanceAE Auto White Balance White Balance Daylight Auto Auto Auto Daylight Fluorescent Daylight Daylight Fluorescent Fluorescent OK Select Fluorescent Move Select Select Select OK OK OK Move Move Move STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 Recording... Recording... Recording... Recording... 720i 720i SFF 720i 720i SFF SFF SFF S Sepia Sepia Sepia Sepia S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 S S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 12:00AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 ٤٣ ٤٣ VP-X205 00994K AR 037~057.indd 43 AR ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movieﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ) ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺞ( ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻤﺜﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ. .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 ١ Recording... Recording... Recording... Recording... ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. 720i 720iF 720i 720i F F F S .٢ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MENU ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ /ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Program AEﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(. .٣ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. ) Autoﺁﻟﻲ( Sepia Sepia Sepia Sepia ٢ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ. ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ٥٠/١ﺇﻟﻰ ٢٥٠/١ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ. ) Sportsﺭﻳﺎﺿﻲ( ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ .ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ. ) Spotlightﺿﻮء( ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻏﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﻂ. ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺳﻴﺔ. AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO Exit Exit Exit Exit MENU MENU MENU MENU ٣ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻠﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﻃﺊ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ ) Sand /Snowﺛﻠﺞ /ﺭﻣﻞ( ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺸﺮ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﻮﺝ. .٤ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [MENUﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Autoﺁﻟﻲ( ،ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ. Exit Exit Exit Exit MENU MENU MENU MENU ٤ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:04:30 Select Select Select Select OK OK OK OK Move Move Move Move Movie MovieAE Movie Movie Program AE AE AE AE AE Program Program Auto Program AE AE Auto Sports Auto Auto Sports Spotlight Sports Sports Spotlight Spotlight OK Select Spotlight Move Select Select Select OK OK OK Move Move Move STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ [ ✤ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ /ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ Movie Record )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. ٤٤ ٤٤ S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 S S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 12:00AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 Movie MovieAE Movie Movie Program AE AE AE AE AE Program AE Program Auto Program AE AE AE Sports Auto AE Auto AE Auto Spotlight Sports Sports Sports Spotlight Spotlight Spotlight Recording... Recording... Recording... Recording... 720i 720i SFF 720i 720i SFF SFF SFF S Sepia Sepia Sepia Sepia S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 S S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 12:00AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 VP-X205 00994K AR 037~057.indd 44 AR ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ:( )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮMovie ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 720i F 720i 720i 720i ١ .ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ/ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ.١ Recording... F F F Recording... Recording... Recording... .( )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢMovie Record ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 SS Sepia 12:00AM 12:00AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 Movie Sepia Sepia Sepia S ٢ Movie Movie Movie Effect AE AE .[MENU] ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ.٢ .(< ) ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮEffect> ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ/ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ AE AE Effect Off Effect Effect Art Off Off Off Mosaic Art Art Art Mosaic Mosaic Move Mosaic Move Move Move Movie .[ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ،ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ/ ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ.٣ OK Select MENU Exit OK OK OK Select Select Select MENU MENU MENU Exit Exit Exit ٣ Movie Movie Movie Effect AE AE AE AE Effect Effect Negrtive Effect Mirror Negrtive Negrtive Negrtive B&W Mirror Mirror Mirror B&W B&W Move B&W Move Move Move OK Select MENU Exit OK OK OK Select Select Select MENU MENU MENU Exit Exit Exit SFF 720i 720i 720i F SF SFF SFF STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 ٤٥ ٤٥ . ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ . ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻣﺰ،(< )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑOff> ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ Recording... Recording... Recording... Recording... S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 SS Mirror 12:00AM 12:00AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 Mirror Mirror Mirror S .[ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔMENU] ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ.٤ ٤ STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 720i .(< )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮEffect> ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ( )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑOff .ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ( )ﻓﻦArt . )ﻓﺴﻴﻔﺴﺎء( ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺴﻴﻔﺴﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚMosaic .ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﻲ ﻳﺸﺒﻪ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ( )ﺑﻨﻲSepia . )ﻧﻴﺠﺎﺗﻴﻒ( ﻳﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻴﺤﺎﻛﻲ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻴﺠﺎﺗﻴﻒNegative .ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺼﻔﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ( )ﻣﺮﺁﺓMirror .ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ B&W VP-X205 00994K AR 037~057.indd 45 [ ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ Movie Record ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ/ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ،✤ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .()ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:04:33 AR ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movieﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ) EISﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ( ﻳﻌﺪ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﺽ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ. ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ: ً ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ) EISﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ/ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ١ Recording... Recording... Recording... Recording... TV PC TV PC TV TVPC .٢ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MENU ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ /ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >.<EIS PC Exit Exit Exit Exit .٣ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. ٣ MENU MENU MENU MENU Select Select Select Select OK OK OK OK TV PC TV PC .٤ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [MENUﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Onﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ) EIS ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Offﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ،ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻣﺰ. F F F S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 S S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 Movie Movie Movie Movie EIS On EIS EIS EIS On Off On On Off Off Off Sepia Sepia Sepia Sepia ٢ ) <On> ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( :ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ .EIS ) <Off> ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( :ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ .EIS 720iF 720i 720i S .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 720i TV TVPC PC (. ٤ Exit Exit Exit Exit MENU MENU MENU MENU Select Select Select Select OK OK OK OK Move Move Move Move Movie Movie Movie Movie EIS On EIS EIS On Off EIS On On Off Off Off Move Move Move Move STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ [ ✤ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ Movie Record )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. Recording... Recording... Recording... Recording... 720i 720i SFF 720i 720i SFF F SFF SF S ٤٦ ٤٦ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:04:37 Sepia Sepia Sepia Sepia S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 S S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 12:00AM VP-X205 00994K AR 037~057.indd 46 AR ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movieﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ .ﻓﻲ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ،ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) AFﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(. STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 ١ .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. .٢ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MENU ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ /ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Focusﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ(. .٣ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. S S S 12:00AM S Sepia Sepia Sepia Sepia ٢ TV PC TV TV PC TVPC : <AF> ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ. : <MF> ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ. PC .٤ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [MENUﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ > ،<AFﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻣﺰ. Exit Exit Exit Exit Select Select Select Select MENU MENU MENU MENU ٣ 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 12:00AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 Movie Movie Movie Movie Focus Focus AF Focus Focus AF AF MF AF MF MF MF Movie Movie Movie Movie Focus Focus AF Focus Focus AF AF MF AF MF MF MF TV PC PC >Manual Focus <MF ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ > <AFﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ✤ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ Movie Record )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. Exit Exit Exit Exit MENU MENU MENU MENU ٤ Move Move Move Move OK OK OK OK TV TV PC TVPC ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ. ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ﻣﺤﺎﻃﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﻮﺝ. ً ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ F F F Recording... Recording... Recording... Recording... ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. Select Select Select Select OK OK OK OK Move Move Move Move STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 Recording... Recording... Recording... Recording... Sepia Sepia Sepia Sepia 720i 720i 720iF 720i 720i 720i 720iF 720i F F F S S S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 12:00AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 ٤٧ ٤٧ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:04:40 VP-X205 00994K AR 037~057.indd 47 AR ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movieﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ) BLCﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ( ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩًﺍ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺗﻤًﺎ ﺟﺪًﺍ ً ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﻩ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺠﻴﺔ. STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY ١ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. S SS 12:00AM S 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 12:00AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 Movie Movie Movie PC Movie PC BLC PC PC BLC BLC On BLC On On Off On Off Off Off Sepia Sepia Sepia Sepia .٢ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MENU ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ /ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ >.<BLC ٢ .٣ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. ) <On> ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( :ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ .BLC ) <Off> ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( :ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ .BLC TV TV TV TV Exit Exit Exit Exit MENU MENU MENU MENU ٣ OK OK OK Movie Movie Movie Movie BLC BLC On BLC BLC On On Off On Off Off Off TV PC PC .٤ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [MENUﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ BLCﻋﻠﻰ >) <Offﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ✤ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ Movie Record )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. Select Select Select Select Exit Exit Exit Exit ٤ MENU MENU MENU MENU Select Select Select Select Move Move Move Move OK TV TVPC TVPC (. ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ) ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Offﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ،ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻣﺰ. 720i 720iF 720i F F F Recording... Recording... Recording... Recording... .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. 720i OK OK OK OK Move Move Move Move STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 Recording... Recording... Recording... Recording... Sepia Sepia Sepia Sepia 720i 720i 720iF 720i F F F S S S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 12:00AM 12:00AM 2006/01/01 ٤٨ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:04:43 VP-X205 00994K AR 037~057.indd 48 AR ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movieﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ١٠ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴًﺎ ،ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ١٠٠ﻣﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻲ. ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) Digital Zoomﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ( ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﻞء ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ. ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻭﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺣﺒﻴﺒﻲ ﺃﻗﻞ. STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY ١ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. .٢ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MENU ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ /ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Digital Zoomﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ(. S S S 12:00AM S Sepia Sepia Sepia Sepia 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 12:00AM 12:00AM 2006/01/01 Movie Movie Movie Movie PC PC Digital ZoomPCPC Digital Zoom Zoom Digital On Digital Zoom On On Off On Off Off Off ٢ TV TV TV TV .٣ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. ) <On> ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( :ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ .ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ) 10xﺣﺘﻰ (100x ) <Off> ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( :ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ .ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻲ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ 10xﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ Exit Exit Exit Exit MENU MENU MENU MENU Select Select Select Select OK OK OK OK Move Move Move Move Movie Movie Movie Movie PC PC Digital ZoomPCPC Digital Zoom Zoom Digital On Digital Zoom On On Off On Off Off Off ٣ TV TV TV TV .٤ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [MENUﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ،ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. Exit Exit Exit Exit ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ [ ✤ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ Movie Record )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. F F F Recording... Recording... Recording... Recording... .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. 720i 720i 720i 720iF ٤ MENU MENU MENU MENU W W W W 1X 1X 1X 1X 10X 10X 10X 10X T T Sepia T T Sepia Sepia Sepia Select Select Select Select OK OK OK OK Move Move Move Move STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY Recording... Recording... Recording... Recording... 720i 720i 720i 720iF F F F S S S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 12:00AM 12:00AM 2006/01/01 ٤٩ ٤٩ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:04:46 VP-X205 00994K AR 037~057.indd 49 AR ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movieﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ. STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 ١ Recording... Recording... Recording... Recording... .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. MoviePC Movie MoviePCMode Record TV RecordPCPCMode Record Record Mode Mode PC TV TV TV PC PC PC TV ٢ TV TV TV Exit MENU Select OK Move Exit Exit Exit MENU MENU MENU Select Select Select OK OK OK Move Move Move ٣ Movie MoviePC Movie MoviePCMode Record TV ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ > ،<TVﺗﻈﻬﺮ > <iﻣﻊ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ. ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ > ،<PCﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ > <pﻣﻊ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ. ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ > <TVﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ 720iﻓﻘﻂ. ✤ ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ > <PCﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ 720pﺃﻭ .352p ✤ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ،352(352x288ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ > <PCﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ. ✤ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ Movie Record )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. F F 12:00AM 2006/01/01 S S S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM Movie2006/01/01 Sepia Sepia Sepia Sepia : <TV> ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. : <PC> ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ. .٤ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [MENUﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. F 720i 720i 720iF S .٢ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MENU ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ /ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Record Modeﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(. .٣ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. 720i TV TV PC TV TV RecordPCMode Record Record Mode Mode PC TV TV TV PC PC PC ٤ Exit MENU Select OK Move Exit Exit Exit MENU MENU MENU Select Select Select OK OK OK Move Move Move STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 Recording... Recording... Recording... Recording... 720p 720pF 720p 720pF F F S Sepia Sepia Sepia Sepia 12:00AM 2006/01/01 S S S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 ٥٠ ٥٠ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:04:49 VP-X205 00994K AR 037~057.indd 50 AR ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movieﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺧﻞ /ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ. ➥ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ١٢٧ﺇﻟﻰ ١٢٩ .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 .٤ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [MENUﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. 720i F F ٢ Sepia Sepia Sepia 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 Movie S S TV AE Movie Line In/Out Movie InPC Line In/Out Out In Line In/Out In Out Out PC TV AE PC TV AE Exit ٣ S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 MENU Select MENU Select OK Select Exit MENU Exit OK Move OK Move Move Movie TV AE Movie Line In/Out Movie PC InPC Line In/Out Out In Line In/Out In Out Out PC TV AE TV AE ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ [ ✤ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ Movie Record )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. F 720i Recording... Recording... : <In> ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. : <Out> ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ. ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 Recording... ١ .٢ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MENU ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ /ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Line In/Outﺩﺧﻞ/ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ(. .٣ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. 720i Exit MENU Select OK Move Exit Exit MENU Select Select OK Move Move MENU OK ٥١ ٥١ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:04:52 VP-X205 00994K AR 037~057.indd 51 AR ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movieﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ. .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ٢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. ﺯﺭ ][PLAY .٢ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [PLAYﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movie Playﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ،ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻞء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .٣ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [DELETEﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ .LCD .٤ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. ٣ 00:00:00/00:10:40 00:00:00/00:10:40 720X576 : <OK> ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. ) <Cancel> ﺍﻟﻐﺎء( :ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ. OK Cancel ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Multi-Viewﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ( .٣ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [W/Tﺇﻟﻰ )) W (WIDEﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ(. ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ. 100-0001 ٣ .٤ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [DELETEﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ .LCD .٥ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. > : <OKﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. >) <Multi Selectﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ( :ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. > ✔ < ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [PLAYﻟﻠﺤﺬﻑ. >) <Allﻛﻞ( :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ. >) <Cancelﺍﻟﻐﺎء( :ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ. ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻔﻠﺔ. ✤ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ Movie Record )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. ٥٢ ٥٢ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:04:56 Select Move OK 100-0001 100-0001 ? ERROR ? Play 00:00:00/00:10:40 00:00:00/00:10:40 Move 720X576 OK ERROR Play Move OK 100-0001 ٤ OK Cancel Select OK Move 100-0003 100-0003 ? ERROR ? ERROR OK Multi Select All OK Cancel Multi Select OK Select All Move Cancel Select OK Move VP-X205 00994K AR 037~057.indd 52 AR ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movieﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ .ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ. .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ٢ 00:00:00/00:10:40 00:00:00/00:10:40 00:00:00/00:10:40 00:00:00/00:10:40 720X576 720X576 720X576 720X576 ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. .٢ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [PLAYﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. 100-0001 100-0001 100-0001 100-0001 ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movie playﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. .٣ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MENU ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ /ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Play Modeﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(. ٣ .٤ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺯﺭ ) (OKﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. >) <Play Oneﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ( :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. >) <Play Allﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ( :ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﺍﻳ ًﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ. >) <Repeat Oneﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ( :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ. >) <Repeat Allﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ( :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ. Exit Exit Exit MENU Exit MENU MENU MENU ٤ .٥ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [MENUﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[PLAY ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. Exit Exit Exit MENU Exit MENU MENU MENU ٥ Movie Movie Movie Movie Play Mode Play Mode Mode Play Play Mode 1 Play One 11 Play One One Play ALL Play One All 1 Play ALL ALL Play All Play All Repeat One ALL1 Play All Repeat One One 11 Repeat Repeat One 1 Select Select Select OK Select OK OK OK Move Move Move Move Movie Movie Movie Movie Play Mode Play Mode Mode Play Play Mode 1 Play One 11 Play One One Play ALL Play One All 1 Play Play All One ALLALL1 Play All Repeat ALL Play All Repeat One One 11 Repeat Repeat One 1 Select Select Select OK Select OK OK OK Move Move Move Move 00:00:10/00:10:30 00:00:10/00:10:30 00:00:10/00:10:30 720X576 00:00:10/00:10:30 720X576 720X576 720X576 ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ [ ✤ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ Movie Record )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. 100-0001 100-0001 100-0001 100-0001 ٥٣ ٥٣ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:04:58 VP-X205 00994K AR 037~057.indd 53 AR ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movieﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩﺓ .ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ. Movie Movie ٣ Lock Lock .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. .٢ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [PLAYﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movie Playﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ،ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻞء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ Exit Exit ٤ MENU MENU Select Select OK OK 00:00:00/00:10:40 00:00:00/00:10:40 .٣ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MENU ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ /ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Lockﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ(. .٤ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻺﻗﻔﺎﻝ. ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ. ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ > < ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻔﻞ. ✤ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. 720X576 720X576 100-0002 100-0002 ٣ .٤ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MENU ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ /ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Lockﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ(. .٥ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. >) <Lockﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ( :ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. >) <Multi Selectﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ( :ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. > < ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [PLAYﻟﻠﻘﻔﻞ. >) <Lock Allﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ( :ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ. >) <Unlock Allﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ( :ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ. Move Move 100-0001 100-0001 ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Multi-Viewﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ( .٣ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [W/Tﺇﻟﻰ )) W (WIDEﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ(. Lock Lock ? ? ERROR ERROR ٤ Exit Exit MENU MENU Select Select OK OK Move Move ٥٤ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:05:01 VP-X205 00994K AR 037~057.indd 54 AR ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movieﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻢ.ﺣﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ. .١ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. .٢ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. Movie ٤ Movie Copy To OK Copy To OK ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. .٣ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [PLAYﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movie Playﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ،ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻞء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .٤ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MENU ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ/ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Copy Toﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ(. .٥ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ. Exit MENU Select OK ٥ Movie Movie Copying file(s)... Copy To SMOV0005.AVI Copying file(s)... Copy To OK SMOV0005.AVI OKPress OK to cancel. Cancel Press OK to cancel. ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Multi-Viewﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ( .٤ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [W/Tﺇﻟﻰ )) W (WIDEﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ(. Exit MENU Select OK Move Move CancelMENU Exit Select OK Move Select OK Move Exit MENU 100-0001 100-0001 ٤ ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ. .٥ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MENU ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ /ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Copy Toﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ(. .٦ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. : <OK> ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. ) <Multi Select> ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ( :ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. > ✔ <ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [PLAYﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ. ) <All> ﻛﻞ( :ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ. ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ .ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ،ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ. ✤ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ >) <Copy Toﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ( ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ. ✤ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:05:03 ? ? ERROR ERROR ٥ OK OK All All Exit Exit MENU MENU Select Select OK OK Move Move ٥٥ VP-X205 00994K AR 037~057.indd 55 AR ٢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photoﺻﻮﺭﺓ( .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ] Wﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ Tﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ﺯﺭ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( U MEN E MOD E HOLD DC IN Movie .٢ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photoﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE Photo DELET DISPLAY ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photoﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ٥٧ ................................................................................................. ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ٥٧ ................................................................................... ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ٥٨ .............................................................................. ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ٥٩ ................................................................................................. ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ٥٩ ....................................................LCD ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ٦٠ ................................................................ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ٦١ ............................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ٦١ ......................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺞ( ٦٢ ........................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ٦٣ ..................................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻼﺵ ٦٤ .................................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ٦٥ ............................................................................ ﺿﺒﻂ ) EISﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ( ٦٦ ..................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ٦٧ .................................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ) BLCﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ( ٦٨ .................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ٦٩ ............................................................................. ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ٧٠ ................................................................................ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ٧٠ ........................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ٧١ ......................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) DPOFﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ( ٧٢ ................................... ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ٧٣ ............................................................................. ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ٧٤ ............................................................................ ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ/ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻓﻘﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻌﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ٥٦ ٥٦ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:05:06 MP3 VP-X205 00994K AR 037~057.indd 56 E MODE MOD ININ DCDC ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ HOLD HOLD ) Photo Modeﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( :ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ E DELETE DELET ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ. AR W T ١ .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ﺯﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. U MEN E MOD E DELET HOLD ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Photo Captureﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(. DC IN .٢ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photoﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE ٢ Capturing... Capturing... .٣ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ. .٤ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ /ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ. Sepia Sepia 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 Capturing... Sepia ٣ S S Capturing... Capturing... Capturing... Sepia ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺎ ،ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ. ً ✤ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ✤ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ >) <Externalﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ(➥ .ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ٩٧ Sepia Sepia S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 S S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 ٥٧ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:05:07 VP-X205 00994K AR 037~057.indd 57 AR ) Photo Modeﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( :ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ 100 ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ W ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ/ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ. ﻭﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ .10x .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. 1X 100 W T ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ 10X 1X Sepia T W 10X ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Photo Captureﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(. W 1X Sepia ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [W/Tﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ. ● ● ● W T T W ● ● ● ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ T W 10X ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ 12:00AM 2006/01/01 S 10X 1X 12:00AM 2006/01/01 S 10X 1X Sepia T W S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 1X Sepia W T 12:00AM 2006/01/01 10X 1X Sepia ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [W/Tﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ. S S Sepia ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺣﺠﻤًﺎ ،ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ. ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ/ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ .T ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻲ ،10xﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﺮﻯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ. 12:00AM 2006/01/01 10X T ﻳﻘﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ. ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ/ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ،LCDﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ .W ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ(. 100 S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 1X Sepia .٢ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photoﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE S 10X S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 1X ✤ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ/ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ . ✤ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻩ 10xﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻩ 10xﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻗﺪﺭﻩ .100x T ✤ ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ. Sepia 12:00AM 2006/01/01 S 10X Sepia 12:00AM 2006/01/01 ٥٨ ٥٨ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:06:34 VP-X205 00994K AR 058~075.indd 58 AR ) Photo Modeﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( :ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCD ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCDﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ،ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻐﻠﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﻠﻖ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻤﻨﺘﻬﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ. W T ١ .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ﺯﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. 100 100 100 ٢ Capturing... Capturing... Capturing... .٣ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [PLAYﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. ◆ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photo Viewﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(. .٤ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ/ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ. Sepia Sepia Sepia 12:00AM 12:00AM2006/01/01 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 01 01 01 Sepia Sepia Sepia ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ✤ ✤ ✤ ✤ SS S 100-0001 100-0001 100-0001 ٣ ◆ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ /ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻪ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ >) <No Files...ﻻ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ.(... ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ. ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ. ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ/ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ. ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ً ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ Photo Capture )ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(. DC IN ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Photo Captureﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(. E MOD E DELET HOLD .٢ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photoﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE U MEN ٤ 12:00AM 12:00AM2006/01/01 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 100-0002 100-0002 100-0002 01 01 01 Sepia Sepia Sepia 12:00AM 12:00AM2006/01/01 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 ٥٩ ٥٩ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:06:37 VP-X205 00994K AR 058~075.indd 59 AR ) Photo Modeﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( :ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [W/Tﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photo Viewﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCDﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ. 100 100 100 ٢ .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. Capturing... Capturing... Capturing... ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. Sepia Sepia Sepia .٢ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photoﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Photo Captureﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(. 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 12:00AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 100-0001 100-0001 100-0001 ٣ 720X480 720X480 720X480 01 01 01 .٣ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [PLAYﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [W/Tﺇﻟﻰ )W (WIDE )ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ(. ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ. .٤ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ/ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ/ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ. Sepia Sepia Sepia ٤ S S S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 12:00AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 100-0001 100-0001 100-0001 01 01 01 .٥ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [PLAYﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ. ◆ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔً. View View View OK OK OK Move Move Move ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻪ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ >) <No Files...ﻻ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ.(... ✤ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ. ✤ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ٦٠ ٦٠ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:06:40 VP-X205 00994K AR 058~075.indd 60 AR ) Photo Modeﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ) White Balanceﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ( ﺑﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻸﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ .ﻭﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ. ٢ .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. Capturing... Capturing... Capturing... Capturing... ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. .٢ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photoﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE .٣ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MENU ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ/ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <White Balanceﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(. ) Autoﺁﻟﻲ( ) Daylightﻧﻬﺎﺭ( ) Fluorescentﻓﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ( ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ. ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ/ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﻠﻖ. ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻤﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻭﺳﻨﺖ. ) Tungstenﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ( ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻤﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﻫﺠﺔ. ) Customﻣﺨﺼﺺ( ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ. .٥ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [MENUﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ◆ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ. ◆ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Autoﺁﻟﻲ( ،ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻣﺰ. Photo Photo Photo Photo ٣ .٤ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. ◆ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ) Customﻣﺨﺼﺺ( ،ﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء )ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ( ،ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻸ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCDﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ .ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ. Exit Exit Exit Exit ✤ ✤ ✤ ✤ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:06:42 MENU MENU MENU MENU White Balance White White Balance Balance A White Balance Auto A Auto A Auto A Daylight Auto Daylight Daylight Fluorescent Daylight Fluorescent Fluorescent Fluorescent Select Select Select Select OK OK OK OK Move Move Move Move Photo Photo Photo Photo ٤ Exit Exit Exit Exit MENU MENU MENU MENU White Balance White White Balance Balance White Balance A Auto A Auto A Auto A Daylight Auto Daylight Daylight Fluorescent Daylight Fluorescent Fluorescent Fluorescent Select Select Select Select OK OK OK OK Move Move Move Move ٥ ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﻠﻖ ،ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ >) <Autoﺁﻟﻲ( ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ،ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ. ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ >) <Customﻣﺨﺼﺺ( ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ .ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ،ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ. ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photo Captureﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(. 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 12:00AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 Sepia Sepia Sepia Sepia ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Photo Captureﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(. S S S S Capturing... Capturing... Capturing... Capturing... Sepia Sepia Sepia Sepia S S S S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 12:00AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 ٦١ ٦١ VP-X205 00994K AR 058~075.indd 61 AR ) Photo Modeﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺞ( ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻤﺜﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) Program AEﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ. .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. 100 100 100 100 ٢ Capturing... Capturing... Capturing... Capturing... ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. .٢ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photoﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE Sepia Sepia Sepia Sepia ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Photo Captureﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(. .٣ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MENU ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ/ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Program AEﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(. 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 12:00AM2006/01/01 2006/01/01 Photo Photo Photo Photo Program AE Program AE Program ProgramAE AE Auto Auto Auto Sports Auto Sports Sports Spotlight Sports Spotlight Spotlight Spotlight OK ٣ .٤ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. ) Autoﺁﻟﻲ( ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ. ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ٥٠/١ﺇﻟﻰ ٢٥٠/١ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ. ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ .ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ) Sportsﺭﻳﺎﺿﻲ( ) Spotlightﺿﻮء( ) Sand/Snowﺛﻠﺞ /ﺭﻣﻞ ( Exit Exit Exit Exit Select Select Select Select MENU MENU MENU MENU OK OK OK ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ. ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻏﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﻂ .ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺳﻴﺔ. .٥ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [MENUﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. Exit Exit Exit Exit OK OK OK Move Move Move Move 100 100 100 100 ◆ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ. ◆ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Autoﺁﻟﻲ( ،ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ. Capturing... Capturing... Capturing... Capturing... ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ [ ✤ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photo Captureﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(. Select Select Select Select MENU MENU MENU MENU ٥ Move Move Move Move Photo Photo Photo Photo Program AE Program AE Program ProgramAE AE Auto Auto Auto Sports Auto Sports Sports Spotlight Sports Spotlight Spotlight Spotlight OK ٤ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻠﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﻃﺊ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺸﺮ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﻮﺝ. S S S S Sepia Sepia Sepia Sepia S S S S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 12:00AM2006/01/01 2006/01/01 ٦٢ ٦٢ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:06:46 VP-X205 00994K AR 058~075.indd 62 AR ) Photo Modeﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ. .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. 100 100 100 100 ٢ Capturing... Capturing... Capturing... Capturing... ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. .٢ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photoﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE Sepia Sepia Sepia Sepia ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Photo Captureﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(. .٣ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MENU ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ/ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Effectﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ(. ٣ .٤ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. ) Offﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ) Artﻓﻦ( ) Mosaicﻓﺴﻴﻔﺴﺎء( ) Sepiaﺑﻨﻲ( ) Negativeﻧﻴﺠﺎﺗﻴﻒ( ) Mirrorﻣﺮﺁﺓ( B&W ﺇﻟﻐﺎء >) <Effectﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ(. ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ. ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺴﻴﻔﺴﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ. ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﻲ ﻳﺸﺒﻪ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ. ﻳﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻴﺤﺎﻛﻲ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻴﺠﺎﺗﻴﻒ. ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺼﻔﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ. ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ. Exit Exit MENU Exit MENU Exit MENU MENU .٥ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [MENUﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Offﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ،ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻣﺰ. ٥ S S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 12:00AM2006/01/01 2006/01/01 Photo Photo Photo Photo Effect Effect Off Effect Off Effect Art Off Art Off Mosaic Art Mosaic Art Mosaic OK Select Move Mosaic OK Select Move Select Select OK OK ٤ Exit Exit Exit Exit S S Select Select Select Select MENU MENU OK OK MENU MENU OK OK Move Move Photo Photo Photo Photo Effect Effect Sepia Effect SepiaEffect Negative Sepia Negative Sepia Mirror Negative Mirror Negative Mirror Move Mirror Move Move Move ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ [ ✤ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photo Captureﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(. 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:06:50 Mirror Mirror Mirror Mirror ٦٣ ٦٣ VP-X205 00994K AR 058~075.indd 63 AR ) Photo Modeﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ 100 ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻳُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻔﻴﺪًﺍ ﺟﺪًﺍ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻟﻴﻼً ،ﺑﻞ ً ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ،ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ،ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ،ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ. 100 ٢ .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. Sepia .٢ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photoﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE ﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ. >) <Autoﺁﻟﻲ( ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ. >) <Offﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( Exit Exit MENU Exit ٥ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:06:53 Select OK Select Photo Flash Exit MENU Exit MENU 100 Flash OnPhoto Photo Auto On Off Auto Flash Off Flash OK Move Select On On Auto OK Select Move Auto Off Off Select MENU Exit Select 100MENU Exit OK OK Capturing... 100 Capturing... 100 Move Move S S Sepia Capturing... 12:00AM 2006/01/01 S Capturing... S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 Sepia Sepia 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 Sepia ٦٤ ٦٤ Move Move Photo OK ٤ ◆ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ. ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ Exit MENU MENU MENU .٥ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [MENUﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺎ ،ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ. ً ✤ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ✤ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻌﺎ ًﻻ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ. ✤ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photo Captureﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(. On Flash Photo Auto Photo On Off Auto Flash Flash Off On OK Select Move On Auto OK Select Move Auto Off Off ٣ .٤ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ، ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﻒ. Photo 12:00AM Photo2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 Flash Sepia Sepia ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Photo Captureﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(. >) <Onﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( Capturing... 12:00AM 2006/01/01 S Capturing... S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 Sepia ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. .٣ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MENU ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ/ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Flashﻓﻼﺵ(. Capturing... 100 Capturing... 100 S S VP-X205 00994K AR 058~075.indd 64 AR ) Photo Modeﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻝ ﺑﻀﻐﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ. ٍ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. 100 100 100 100 ٢ Capturing... Capturing... Capturing... Capturing... ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. Sepia Sepia Sepia Sepia .٢ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photoﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Photo Captureﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(. .٣ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MENU ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ/ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Continuous Shotﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ(. .٤ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. ◆ >) <Offﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ. ◆ >) <3 shotsﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ :(3ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ٣ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ. .٥ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [MENUﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ◆ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ. ◆ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Offﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ،ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻣﺰ. Exit Exit Exit MENU Exit ٥ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:06:56 Select Select Select OK Select OK OK OK 100 100 100 100 Capturing... Capturing... Capturing... Capturing... Sepia Sepia Sepia Sepia Move Move Move Move Photo Photo Photo Continuous Photo Shot Continuous Shot Continuous Shot Off Off Continuous 3 shots Shot Off 3 shots 3Off shots 3 shots MENU MENU MENU ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ) Continuous Shotﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ( ،ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ. ✤ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photo Captureﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(. Select Select Select OK Select OK OK OK MENU MENU MENU Exit Exit Exit MENU Exit S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 Photo Photo Photo Photo Shot Continuous Continuous Shot Continuous Shot Off Off Continuous 3 shots Shot Off 3 shots 3Off shots 3 shots ٣ ٤ S S S Move Move Move Move S S S S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 ٦٥ ٦٥ VP-X205 00994K AR 058~075.indd 65 AR ) Photo Modeﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﺒﻂ ) EISﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ( ﻳﻌﺪ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﺽ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ. ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ: ً ﻳﻌﻤﻞ EISﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ◆ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ/ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ◆ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ◆ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ◆ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. 100 100 ٢ .٢ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photoﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Photo Captureﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(. Sepia Sepia Sepia Sepia 12:00AM 2006/01/01 Photo 12:00AM 2006/01/01 Photo PhotoEIS Photo EIS On On Off EIS EIS Off On On Off OK Select Move Off MENU Select MENU MENU Select Select Exit Exit (. Move OK OK Move Move Exit Exit Select Select OK MENU MENU Photo Photo PhotoEIS Photo EIS On On Off EIS EIS Off On On Off Move Off OK Move OK OK Move Move Select MENU Exit MENU Exit Select 100 100 ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ [ ✤ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photo Captureﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(. 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:07:00 OK ٤ ٥ S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 Exit Exit .٤ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. ◆ >) <Onﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( :ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ .EIS ◆ >) <Offﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( :ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ .EIS ٦٦ ٦٦ Capturing... Capturing... S MENU .٣ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MENU ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ/ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >.<EIS .٥ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [MENUﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. S ٣ ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. ◆ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Onﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ) EIS ◆ ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Offﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ،ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻣﺰ. 100 100 Capturing... Capturing... S 100 100 Capturing... Capturing... S Capturing... Capturing... S S S Sepia Sepia 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 Sepia Sepia 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 VP-X205 00994K AR 058~075.indd 66 AR ) Photo Modeﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ 100 ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ. .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. 100 100 ٢ 100 Capturing... ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. Capturing... Capturing... .٢ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photoﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE Capturing... 12:00AM 2006/01/01 Sepia Sepia 12:00AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 12:00AM Sepia 12:00AM 2006/01/01 Photo ٣ Photo Photo Focus Photo AF Focus Focus MF AF Focus AF MF MF AF .٤ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. ◆ > : <AFﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ. ◆ > : <MFﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ. .٥ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [MENUﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ◆ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ > ،<MFﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ (. ◆ ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ > ،<AFﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻣﺰ. Exit >Manual Focus <MF ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ. ◆ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺤﺎﻃﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﻮﺝ ً ◆ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ Exit Exit MENU MENU Select MENU Exit MENU 100 Select OK OK OK Move Move Photo Move Photo Photo Focus Photo AF Focus Focus MF AF Focus AF MF MF AF OK Select Select MENU MENU OK OK OK Move MF Move Move Move 100 100 100 Capturing... ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ [ Capturing... Capturing... ✤ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photo Captureﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(. Sepia 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:07:03 Select Move MF OK Select Select MENU Exit Exit ٥ Select MENU Exit Exit ٤ SS S Sepia ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Photo Captureﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(. .٣ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MENU ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ /ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Focusﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ(. S S SS Capturing... S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 Sepia Sepia 12:00AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 12:00AM Sepia 12:00AM 2006/01/01 ٦٧ ٦٧ VP-X205 00994K AR 058~075.indd 67 AR ) Photo Modeﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﺒﻂ ) BLCﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ( 100 ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩًﺍ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺎﺗﻤًﺎ ﺟﺪًﺍ ً ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﻩ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ٢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ. ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Photo Captureﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(. Sepia Capturing... Capturing... Capturing... S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 Sepia Sepia Sepia 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM Photo2006/01/01 ٣ .٣ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MENU ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ/ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ >.<BLC Exit .٤ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. ◆ >) <Onﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( :ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ .BLC ◆ >) <Offﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( :ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ .BLC Select MENU Exit Exit MENU Exit ٤ OK Exit Select MENU MENU MENU ٥ Move Move Photo Move OK OK .٥ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [MENUﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. Exit Exit MENU Exit Photo BLC Photo Photo On BLC Off BLC On BLC On Off On Off Move Off Select Select OK Select MENU MENU ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ◆ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ) ◆ ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Offﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ،ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻣﺰ. ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ S S S .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. .٢ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photoﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE 100 100 Capturing...100 OK Photo BLC Photo Photo On BLC Off BLC On BLC On Off On Off Move Off Select Select OK Select OK OK 100 100 100 Capturing...100 ✤ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) BLCﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ >) <Offﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ✤ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photo Captureﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(. Move Move Move S Sepia Capturing... Capturing... Capturing... S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 Sepia Sepia Sepia 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 S S ٦٨ ٦٨ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:07:06 VP-X205 00994K AR 058~075.indd 68 AR ) Photo Modeﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴًﺎ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ 10xﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ً ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻲ ،10xﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ 100xﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ .ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮﻩ .ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺣﺒﻴﺒﻲ. 100 100 100 ٢ 100 Capturing... Capturing... Capturing... .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Photo Captureﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(. Sepia Sepia Sepia Sepia ٣ .٣ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MENU ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ/ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Digital Zoomﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ(. Exit Exit Exit MENU Exit .٤ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ◆ >) <Onﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( :ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ .ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ) 10xﺣﺘﻰ (100x ◆ >) <Offﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( :ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ .ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ 10xﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ٤ .٥ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [MENUﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ [ ٥ Exit W W W W 12:00AM 2006/01/01 Photo Photo Photo Digital PhotoZoom Digital Digital Zoom Zoom On On OffDigital Zoom On Off On Off Select Select Select OK Select MENU OK MENU MENU MENU MENU S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 12:00AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 OK OK Exit MENU Exit MENU Exit ◆ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ،ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ✤ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photo Captureﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(. S S Capturing... ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. .٢ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photoﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE S Off Move Move Move Move Photo Photo Photo Digital PhotoZoom Digital Zoom Zoom Digital On On OffDigital Zoom On Off On Off Select OK Select OK Select OK Select OK Off Move Move Move Move 1X 1X 1X 1X 10X 10X 10X T 10X Sepia T T Sepia Sepia T Sepia 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:07:09 ٦٩ ٦٩ VP-X205 00994K AR 058~075.indd 69 AR ) Photo Modeﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ. .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ٣ ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. .٢ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photoﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Photo Captureﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(. ﺯﺭ)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. .٣ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [PLAYﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. ◆ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photo Viewﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(. ◆ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ،ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻞء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .٤ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [DELETEﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ .LCD .٥ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. ٤ 100-0001 01 ◆ > : <OKﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. ◆ >) <Cancelﺍﻟﻐﺎء( :ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ. OK Cancel Sepia .٦ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [MENUﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Multi-Viewﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ( ﺯﺭ ][PLAY OK Select Move 2006/01/01 12:00AM 100-0001 ٤ 100-0001 .٤ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [W/Tﺇﻟﻰ )) W (WIDEﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ(. ◆ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ. .٥ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [DELETEﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ .LCD .٦ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ > : <OKﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. >) <Multi Selectﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ( :ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. > ✔ < ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [PLAYﻟﻠﺤﺬﻑ. >) <Allﻛﻞ( :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ. >) <Cancelﺍﻟﻐﺎء( :ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ. ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ٧٠ ٧٠ ✤ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻔﻠﺔ. ✤ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photo Captureﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(. 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:07:13 100-0001 View 01 OK View OK Sepia ٥ Move OK Move Cancel OK Select Move 2006/01/01 12:00AM 100-0001 100-0001 OK Multi Select All OK CanceSlelect Multi Select OK Select OK All Move Cancel Move VP-X205 00994K AR 058~075.indd 70 AR ) Photo Modeﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ،ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ٣ ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. 100-0001 100-0001 100-0001 01 01 01 .٢ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photoﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE OK OK OK ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Photo Captureﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(. .٣ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [PLAYﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. ◆ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photo Viewﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(. ◆ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ،ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. .٤ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MENU ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ/ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Slideﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ(. .٥ﺣﺪﺩ >)) <Interval (sec.ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ )ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(( ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. .٦ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. Sepia Sepia Sepia ٥ Exit Exit ﺛﻮﺍﻥ. ◆ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ١ :ﺇﻟﻰ ٍ ١٠ .٧ﺣﺪﺩ >) <Repeatﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ( ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. .٨ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. ٧ ◆ >) <Offﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ. ◆ >) <Onﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ. .٩ﺣﺪﺩ >) <Startﺑﺪﺃ( ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. ◆ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ .ﻭﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ✤ ✤ ✤ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ. ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ. ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﺎﻟﻒ .ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ. ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photo Captureﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(. 100-0001 Photo 100-0001 Photo 100-0001 Photo Slide Slide Start Slide Start )Interval (sec. )(sec. 1 Interval 1 Start Repeat Off )Interval (sec. 1 Repeat Off Repeat Off MENU Exit OK Select Move OK MENU ٩ MENU Select Select OK Move Move 100-0001 Photo 100-0001 Photo 100-0001 Photo Slide Slide Slide Start Start 1 Interval 1 Interval )(sec. )Start (sec. Repeat Off 1 Interval )Repeat (sec. Off Repeat Off MENU Exit OK Select Move Exit Exit MENU MENU Select Select 100-0001 100-0001 100-0001 01 01 OK OK Move Move Slide Slide Slide 01 Sepia Stop Sepia Stop Sepia Stop OK OK OK ٧١ ٧١ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:07:19 VP-X205 00994K AR 058~075.indd 71 100-0001 100-0001 01 01 AR ) Photo Modeﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ OK OK Sepia Sepia ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) DPOFﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ( ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣُﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ) DPOFﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(. ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ DPOFﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ. ٥ 100-0001 100-0001 Photo Photo 1 1 DPOF DPOF Copies Copies Off Off .١ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. .٢ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. .٣ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photoﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Photo Captureﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(. .٤ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [PLAYﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. ◆ ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photo Viewﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(. ◆ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ،ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. Exit Exit ٧ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ DPOFﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻞء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .٧ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [MENUﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. OK OK 100-0001 100-0001 100-0001 01 .٥ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MENU ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ/ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >.<DPOF .٦ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. ◆ >) <Copiesﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ( :ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ) .ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ٠ :ﺇﻟﻰ (٣٠ ◆ >) <Offﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( :ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ .DPOF MENU MENU Select Select 1 1 OK OK OK Sepia Sepia Sepia ٦ 100-0001 Photo ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ DPOFﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ DPOF .٥ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [W/Tﺇﻟﻰ )) W (WIDEﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ(. Copies Set All Reset All 1 ◆ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ. .٦ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MENU ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ/ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >.<DPOF .٧ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. ◆ >) <Copiesﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ( :ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ) .ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ٠ :ﺇﻟﻰ (٣٠ ◆ >) <Set Allﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ( :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ .DPOF ◆ >) <Reset Allﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ( :ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ. .٨ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [MENUﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ٧٢ ٧٢ ✤ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ > < ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﺤﻮﺑًﺎ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ .DPOF ✤ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ١٣٠ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ .DPOF ✤ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photo Captureﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(. 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:07:24 Move Move Exit MENU ٨ Select Move OK 100-0001 100-0001 01 1 OK Sepia View 100-0001 OK Move Photo DPOF Copies 1 Set All AR 058~075.indd 72 VP-X205 00994K Reset All 100-0001 100-0001 AR 01 01 ) Photo Modeﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ OK OK ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ .ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ. Sepia Sepia 100-0001 100-0001 ٤ Photo Photo .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ/ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. Lock Lock ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. Lock Lock .٢ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photoﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Photo Captureﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(. Exit Exit .٣ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [PLAYﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. ◆ ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photo Viewﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(. ◆ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ،ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. ٥ OK OK 100-0001 100-0001 1 1 ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻞء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .٤ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MENU ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ/ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Lockﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ(. .٥ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. ◆ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. ◆ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [MENUﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ. MENU MENU Select Select OK OK Sepia Sepia 100-0001 100-0001 ٥ Photo Photo Lock Lock Multi Select Multi Select Lock All Lock All Unlock All Unlock All ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Multi-Viewﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ( .٤ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [W/Tﺇﻟﻰ )) W (WIDEﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ(. ◆ ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ. .٥ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MENU ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ/ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Lockﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ(. .٦ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ >) <Lockﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ( :ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. >) <Multi Selectﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ( :ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ > < ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [PLAYﻟﻠﻘﻔﻞ. >) <Lock Allﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ( :ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ. >) <Unlock Allﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ( :ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ. ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ > < ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻔﻞ. ✤ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photo Captureﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(. 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:07:29 Move Move Exit Exit ٦ MENU MENU Select Select OK OK Move Move 100-0001 100-0001 View View OK OK Move Move ٧٣ ٧٣ VP-X205 00994K AR 058~075.indd 73 AR ) Photo Modeﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ. .١ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. .٢ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ /ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ٤ 100-0001 01 ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. .٣ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photoﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE OK ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Photo Captureﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(. .٤ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [PLAYﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. ◆ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photo Viewﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(. ◆ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ،ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. Sepia ٥ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻞء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ Copy To 01 01 .٥ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MENU ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ/ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Copy Toﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ(. .٦ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. OK OK OK Exit Sepia Sepia MENU ◆ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Multi-Viewﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ( .٥ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [W/Tﺇﻟﻰ )) W (WIDEﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ(. 100-0001 100-0001 100-0001 ٥ Photo Photo Photo Exit Exit Exit OK OK OK Multi Select Multi Select AllPress OK to cancel. All Cancel MENU MENU MENU ٧ Select Select Select OK OK OK 100-0001 100-0001 Move Move Move Photo Photo Copying file(s)... DPOF Copying file(s)... DCAM0001.JPG DPOF DCAM0001.JPG OK OKPress OK to cancel. ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:07:34 Move Copying Copyfile(s)... To DPOFTo SMOV0001.JPG Copy .٦ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MENU ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ/ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Copy Toﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ(. .٧ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. ✤ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ .ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ،ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ. ✤ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ >) <Copy Toﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ( ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ. ✤ ٧٤ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photo Captureﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(. ٧٤ Select OK 100-0001 100-0001 100-0001 ◆ ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ. ◆ > : <OKﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. ◆ >) <Multi Selectﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ( :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. > ✔ < ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [PLAYﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ. ◆ >) <Allﻛﻞ( :ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ. Photo Exit Exit Press OK to cancel. Cancel Cancel MENU MENU Select Select OK 100-0001 100-0001 OK Move Move Photo Photo Copying file(s)... DPOF Copying file(s)... DPOF OK OK VP-X205 00994K ARto058~075.indd 74 Press OK cancel. Press OK to cancel. AR ٣ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ MP3 .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]Wﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔMovie . T ﺯﺭ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( U MEN E /ﻞﻴﻐﺸﺗ ﺭﺯ ﻑﺎﻘﻳﺇ MOD E DELET ﻭﺿﻊ MP3 ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ MP3ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ٧٦ ......................................................... ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ MP3ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ٧٦ ............................................ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ٧٧ ................................................................................................ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ٧٧ ...........................................................................MP3 ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ٧٨ .........................................................................MP3 ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ٧٨ ........................................................................... MP3 ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ ٧٩ ........................................................................ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ٨٠ .................................................................................. ﺇﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ٨١ ............................................................................. MP3 ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ٨٢ .............................................................................MP3 HOLD DISPLAY DC IN Photo ◆ ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ/ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻓﻘﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻌﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. .٢ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ MP3ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE MP3 ٧٥ ٧٥ ٥٥٧٧ Voice Recorder 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:07:36 VP-X205 00994K AR 058~075.indd 75 AR ﻭﺿﻊ :MP3ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ MP3ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ MP3ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ MP3ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ .USB ﺏ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء! ◆ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ MP3ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ >) <USB Modeﻭﺿﻊ (USBﻋﻠﻰ >) <Mass Storgeﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ( ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ٩٨ ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. ◆ ﺃ -ﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USBﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ◆ ﺏ -ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USBﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ. MMC/SD .٢ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USBﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ. USB .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ﺃ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ. ً .٣ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ. ً .٤ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ MUSICﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻗﻪ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ .٥ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻣﻠﻒ MP3ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺃﺳﻘﻄﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ) MUSICﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ(. ◆ ﻳﺴﺘﻮﻋﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ٢٠٠٠ﻣﻠﻒ .MP3 ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ USB ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ. .١ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ '') 'Safely Remove Hardwareﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ'(. .٢ﺣﺪﺩ ") "Stopﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USBﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ. ٧٦ ] ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ [ ✤ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ MP3ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ. ✤ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ✤ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻌﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ MP3ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ .٣٢ ✤ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺟﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ. 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:08:40 VP-X205 00994K AR 076~096.indd 76 AR ﻭﺿﻊ :MP3ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ MP3 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ MP3ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ. .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ٣ Life is cool.mp3 Everytime.mp3 Life is cool.mp3 Toxic.mp3 Everytime.mp3 Don't push me.mp3 Toxic.mp3 Love push you.mp3 Don't me.mp3 Love you.mp3 ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. .٢ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ MP3ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ .MP3 ◆ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﻒ mp3ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "") "No Files...ﻻ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ.("... .٣ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻒ MP3ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. .٤ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ MP3ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. ◆ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺆﻗﺘًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [PLAYﺃﻭ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. ◆ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ. ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ. ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ٍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ /ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ( ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ ◆ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ – ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ. ◆ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ/ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ -ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ. ◆ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ – ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ◆ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ -ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ. ◆ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ/ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ -ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ. ◆ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ/ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ MP3ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ. Play Play ٤ 1/6 1/6 OK OK Move Move Life is cool.mp3 Sweetbox Life is cool.mp3 Stereo 44.1KHz 192Kbps Sweetbox Stereo 44.1KHz 192Kbps 00:01:07/00:03:27 00:01:07/00:03:27 Pause Pause OK OK List List Search Search ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ -ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ) HOLDﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ(MP3/ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ) HOLDﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ (MP3/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺯﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ. ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ) HOLDﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ (MP3/ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ MP3ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ. ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ MP3ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ .ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ MP3ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ،ﻓﺘﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺧﺎﻟﻴًﺎ. ✤ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ ،ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ✤ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ .MP3 ✤ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺘﻲ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ/ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ✤ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ .MP3 ✤ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ MP3ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻔﺸﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ. ✤ ﺳﻴﻔﺸﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺗﺎﻟﻔًﺎ. ✤ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ. ✤ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ MP3ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ VBRﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCDﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ VBRﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ. ﻼ ﺟﺪًﺍ ،ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ .LCD ✤ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻃﻮﻳ ً ✤ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ MP3ﻫﻲ ﻣﻦ ٨ﻙ ﺏ/ﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ٣٢٠ﻙ ﺏ/ﺙ ﻭ.VBR 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:08:41 ٧٧ VP-X205 00994K AR 076~096.indd 77 AR ﻭﺿﻊ :MP3ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ MP3 ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ MP3 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ MP3ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ .MP3 1/6 1/6 .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. Life is cool.mp3 Life is cool.mp3 Sweetbox Sweetbox Stereo 44.1KHz 192Kbps ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. Life is cool.mp3 Life is cool.mp3 Everytime.mp3 Everytime.mp3 Toxic.mp3 Toxic.mp3 Don't push me.mp3 Don't push me.mp3 Love you.mp3 Love you.mp3 Stereo 44.1KHz 192Kbps 00:00:00/00:03:27 00:00:00/00:03:27 .٢ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ MP3ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ .MP3 ◆ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ MP3ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. ٢ Pause Pause ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ MP3ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ MP3 List List OK OK Search Search Play Play OK OK Move Move ٣ 1/6 1/6 .٣ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [DELETEﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCDﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ .ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. ◆ ◆ > : <OKﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ Mp3ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. Cancel ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. >) <Multi Selectﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ( :ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ Mp3ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ Cancel Move Select Play > ✔ < ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]Move .[PLAY Playﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭSelect >) <Allﻛﻞ( :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ .MP3 >) <Cancelﺍﻟﻐﺎء( :ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ. OK OK ◆ ◆ Select Select OK OK ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ MP3ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻞء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 1/6 1/6 ٣ Life is cool.mp3 Life is cool.mp3 Sweetbox Sweetbox Stereo 44.1KHz 192Kbps .٣ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [PLAYﺃﻭ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. Stereo 44.1KHz 192Kbps 00:00:00/00:03:27 ◆ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ MP3ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. .٤ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [DELETEﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCDﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ .ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. ◆ > : <OKﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ MP3ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. ◆ >) <Cancelﻟﻐﺎء( :ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ. ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻔﻠﺔ. ✤ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. OK OK 00:00:00/00:03:27 Pause Pause ٤ List List OK OK Search Search 1/6 1/6 Play Play OK OK Select Select OK OK Cancel Cancel Move Move ٧٨ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:08:44 VP-X205 00994K AR 076~096.indd 78 3 3 AR MP3 ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ:MP3 ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ ٣ Life is cool.mp3 Life is cool.mp3 Everytime.mp3 Life is cool.mp3 cool.mp3 Everytime.mp3 Life is Toxic.mp3 Everytime.mp3 Toxic.mp3 Everytime.mp3 Don't push me.mp3 Toxic.mp3 Don't push me.mp3 Toxic.mp3 Love you.mp3 Don'tyou.mp3 push me.mp3 me.mp3 Love Don't push Love you.mp3 you.mp3 OK Play MoveLove Move Move Move OK OK OK .ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ/ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ.١ .( )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢMovie Record ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ .[MODE] ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭMP3 ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ.٢ Play Play Play MP3 MP3 MP3Life is cool.mp3 MP3 Repeat Life is cool.mp3 Everytime.mp3 Repeat Life is is cool.mp3 cool.mp3 Everytime.mp3 Repeat Life Off Repeat Toxic.mp3 Everytime.mp3 Off 1 me Everytime.mp3 RepeatToxic.mp3 One Don't on't 't push me.m me.mp3 3 Off Don't Toxic.mp3 1 me Repeat One on't 't you.mp3 push me.m me.mp3 3 Off Love RepeatToxic.mp3 Folder 1 me RepeatLove One Don't on't push me.m me.mp3 1 me One Repeat Folder Don't on't 't'tyou.mp3 push me.m me.mp3 33 Love you.mp3 Repeat Folder OK Select MENU Exit MoveLove you.mp3 Repeat Folder Move Move Move OK OK OK Select Select Select MENU MENU MENU Select OK Select OK Select OK Exit MENU Exit MENU Exit MENU 1 1 1 1 Life is cool.mp3 Life is cool.mp3 Everytime.mp3 Life is cool.mp3 cool.mp3 Everytime.mp3 Life is Toxic.mp3 Everytime.mp3 Toxic.mp3 Everytime.mp3 Don't push me.mp3 Toxic.mp3 Don't push me.mp3 Toxic.mp3 Love you.mp3 Don'tyou.mp3 push me.mp3 me.mp3 Love Don't push Love you.mp3 OK Play MoveLove you.mp3 Move Move Move OK OK OK .MP3 ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ٤ Play Play Play .[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖMENU] ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ.٣ .(< )ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭRepeat> ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ/ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ .[ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ/ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ.٤ Exit Exit Exit MP3 MP3 MP3Life is cool.mp3 MP3 Repeat Life is cool.mp3 Everytime.mp3 Repeat Life is is cool.mp3 cool.mp3 Everytime.mp3 Repeat Off Repeat Life Toxic.mp3 Everytime.mp3 Off 1 me RepeatToxic.mp3 One't push Everytime.mp3 Don't me.m me.mp3 3 Off Don't Toxic.mp3 1 me Repeat One Off 't you.mp3 push me.m me.mp3 3 RepeatToxic.mp3 Folder Love 1 me RepeatLove One'tyou.mp3 Don't push me.m me.mp3 1 me One Repeat Folder Don't 't push me.m me.mp3 33 Repeat Folder Love you.mp3 OK Select MENU Exit MoveLove Repeat Folder you.mp3 Move Move Move . ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔMP3 ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕMP3 ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕMP3 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ٥ . ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩMP3 ﺑﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ، ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ:(< )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑOff> . ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭMP3 ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ:(< )ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪRepeat One> . ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ:(< )ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪRepeat Folder> . ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔMP3 ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ:(< )ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻞRepeat All> . ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ:(< )ﺧﻠﻂ ﻣﺠﻠﺪShuffle Folder> . ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓMP3 ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ:(< )ﺧﻠﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞShuffle All> ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ .[ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔMENU] ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ.٥ .[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢMP3 ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ . ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ،MP3 ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ . ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻣﺰ،(< )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑOff> ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ [ ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ/✤ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺘﻲ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ .ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ .✤ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ٧٩ VP-X205 00994K AR 076~096.indd 79 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:08:50 AR MP3 ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ:MP3 ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ . )ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ( ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔEqualizer ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ٢ Life is cool.mp3 Life is cool.mp3 Everytime.mp3 Life is cool.mp3 cool.mp3 Everytime.mp3 Life is Toxic.mp3 Everytime.mp3 Toxic.mp3 Everytime.mp3 Don't push me.mp3 Toxic.mp3 Don't push me.mp3 Toxic.mp3 Love you.mp3 Don't push me.mp3 me.mp3 Love you.mp3 Don't push Love you.mp3 you.mp3 OK Play MoveLove Move Move Move OK OK OK MP3 MP3 MP3 MP3 .ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ/ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ.١ .( )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢMovie Record ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ .[MODE] ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭMP3 ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ.٢ Play Play Play .MP3 ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ٣ .[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖMENU] ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ.٣ .(< )ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥEqualizer> ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ/ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ Move Move Move Move OK MENU OK MENU OK OK MENU MENU Exit Exit Exit Exit MP3 MP3 MP3 MP3 ٤ .[ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ/ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ.٤ (< )ﺟﺎﺯJazz>/(< )ﻛﻼﺳﻴﻜﻴﺔClassic>/(< )ﺑﻮﺏPop>/(< )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑOff> ◆ .[ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔMENU] ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ.٥ Move Move Move Move Select Select OK Select OK Select OK OK Exit Exit MENU Exit MENU Exit 1/6 1/6 1/6 Life is cool.mp3 1/6 Life is cool.mp3 Sweetbox Life is 44.1KHz cool.mp3 Sweetbox Life is cool.mp3 Stereo 192Kbps Sweetbox Stereo 44.1KHz 192Kbps Sweetbox 00:01:07/00:03:27 Stereo 44.1KHz 192Kbps 192Kbps Stereo 44.1KHz 00:01:07/00:03:27 00:01:07/00:03:27 00:01:07/00:03:27 Search Search Search Search List List List List .◆ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ . ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻣﺰ،(< )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑOff> ◆ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ MENU MENU OK OK OK OK POP POP ٥ [ ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ .✤ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ POP POP Pause Pause Pause Pause VP-X205 00994K AR 076~096.indd 80 ٨٠ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:08:58 AR MP3 ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ:MP3 ﻭﺿﻊ MP3 ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ٢ ٣ Lifeis iscool.mp3 cool.mp3 Life Lock Lock Everytime.mp3 Everytime.mp3 Lock Toxic.mp3 Lock Toxic.mp3 MultiSelect Select Don't pushme me.m me me.mp3 Multi Don't 't'tpush me.m me.mp3 33 Loveyou.mp3 you.mp3 LockAll All Love Lock Select Select OK OK MENU MENU Exit Exit ٣ Exit Exit ٨١ Move Move Pause Pause ٤ 1/6 1/6 OK OK .[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖMENU] ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ.٣ .<< >ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝLock> ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ/ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ 192Kbps Stere Stereo KHzz 192Kbps 44.1 44.1KHz Lock .[ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ/ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ.٤ oo 44.1 Stere Stereo KH 44.1KHz Lock . ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩMP3 ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ:(< )ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝLock> .[ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢMP3 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ:(< )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩMulti Select> Select Move Exit Select Move Exit .[PLAY] ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ.> < ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ .MP3 ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ:(< )ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻞLock All> .MP3 ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ:(< )ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻞUnlock All> ◆ ◆ MENU MENU ◆ ◆ . ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩMP3 ◆ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ OK OK Lock Lock MENU MENU MP3 ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞMP3 ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ [[ ﺃﻭ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢPLAY] ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ.٣ 192Kbps Stere Stereo KHzz 192Kbps 44.1 44.1KHz Lock oo 44.1 Stere Stereo KH 44.1KHz Lock 00:00:00/00:03:27 00:00:00/00:03:27 me.m me me.mp3 me me.m me.mp3 33 p3 p3 Pause Pause .MP3 ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ .[ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢMP3 ◆ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻞء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔMP3 ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ List List MP3 MP3 mp3 mp3 p3 p3 OK OK 1/6 1/6 MP3 MP3 OK OK 192Kbps Stereo 44.1KHz 192Kbps Stereo 44.1KHz 00:00:00/00:03:27 00:00:00/00:03:27 Search Search List List 00:00:00/00:03:27 00:00:00/00:03:27 Life is is cool.mp3 cool.mp3 Life Sweetbox Sweetbox me.mp3 me.mp3 p3 p3 .( )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢMovie Record ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ .[MODE] ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭMP3 ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ.٢ Lock Lock 1/6 1/6 mp3 mp3 p3 p3 ct ct Search Search MP3 MP3 Move Move .ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ/ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ.١ 192Kbps Stereo 44.1KHz 44.1KHz 192Kbps Stereo 00:00:00/00:03:27 00:00:00/00:03:27 Play Play OK OK 1/6 Lifeis iscool.mp3 cool.mp3 Life Sweetbox Sweetbox Lifeis iscool.mp3 cool.mp3 Life Everytime.mp3 Everytime.mp3 Toxic.mp3 Toxic.mp3 Don'tpush pushme.mp3 me.mp3 Don't Loveyou.mp3 you.mp3 Love Move Move ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ. ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩMP3 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ .ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ 1/6 Select Select .[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖMENU] ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ.٤ .(< )ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝLock> ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ/ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ .[ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ.٥ . ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩMP3 ◆ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ .✤ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ > < ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻔﻞ .✤ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ MENU MENU Exit Exit VP-X205 00994K AR 076~096.indd 81 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:09:05 AR MP3 ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ:MP3 ﻭﺿﻊ MP3 ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ٣ Life Life is is cool.mp3 cool.mp3 Everytime.mp3 Everytime.mp3 Toxic.mp3 Toxic.mp3 Don't Don't push push me.mp3 me.mp3 Love Love you.mp3 you.mp3 Move Move 3 3 Search Move Move Search List Select Select List ٤ Pause Exit Exit Pause 1/6 ٥ .MP3 ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ .[ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢMP3 ◆ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ MP3 ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞMP3 ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ 1/6 1/6 MP3 MP3 . ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩMP3 ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ: <OK> ◆ Move Select(])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖExit .[ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺒﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭMP3 ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ:(< )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩMulti Select> ◆ Move Select Exit .[PLAY] ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ.> ✔ < ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ .MP3 ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ:(< )ﻛﻞAll> ◆ MP3 1/6 MENU MENU MP3 1/6 ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻞء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔMP3 ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ [[ ﺃﻭ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢPLAY] ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ.٤ OK OK 00:00:00/00:03:27 Exit Move OK Select MENU Exit ENU Exit Move OK Select MENU Exit MP3 Pause Pause Copying file(s)... Copying file(s)... LifeDPOF is cool.mp3 LifeDPOF is cool.mp3 ENU 1/6 OKPress OK to cancel. Cancel Press OK to cancel. Move OK CancelMENU Exit Select Move OK Select MENU Exit VP-X205 00994K AR 076~096.indd 82 . ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩMP3 ◆ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ Press OK to cancel. Press OK to cancel. Cancel Cancel Move Move ٦ 1/6 MP3 file(s)... Copying LifeDPOF is cool.mp3 Copying file(s)... is cool.mp3 OKLifeDPOF OK OK OK OK 00:00:00/00:03:27 Stereo OK 44.1KHz 192Kbps 3 List List .[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖMENU] ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ.٤ .(< )ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰCopy To> ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ/ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ 00:00:00/00:03:27 [ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ/ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ.٥ 00:00:00/00:03:27 1/6 Life MP3 is cool.mp3 Copy To Sweetbox Life is cool.mp3 Stereo 44.1KHz To192Kbps OK Copy Sweetbox 3 .( )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢMovie Record ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ .[MODE] ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭMP3 ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ.٣ Life cool.mp3 Life is isCopy cool.mp3 Copy To To Sweetbox Sweetbox Stereo 44.1KHz 192Kbps OK Stereo OK 44.1KHz 192Kbps OK MENU MENU OK OK OK MP3 Life Life is is cool.mp3 cool.mp3 Sweetbox Sweetbox Search Search 1/6 MP3 MP3 1/6 Life is cool.mp3 Life is Copy Sweetbox LifeTo is cool.mp3 cool.mp3 To Life isCopy cool.mp3 Everytime.mp3 Stereo 44.1KHz 192Kbps Everytime.mp3 Sweetbox OK Toxic.mp3 OK 00:00:00/00:03:27 Toxic.mp3 Stereo 192Kbps 44.1KHz Don't 't push me.m me.mp3 33 Multi Select Don't 't push me me.m me me.mp3 Multi Select 00:00:00/00:03:27 Love you.mp3 All All Love you.mp3 . ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ.١ .ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ/ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ.٢ Stereo 44.1KHz 192Kbps Stereo 44.1KHz 192Kbps 00:00:00/00:03:27 00:00:00/00:03:27 Play Play OK OK .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ 1/6 1/6 OK OK Select Select MENU MENU Exit Exit .[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖMENU] ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ.٥ .(< )ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰCopy To> ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ/ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ .[ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ.٦ . ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩMP3 ◆ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ [ ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ، ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ.✤ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ .ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ .< )ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ( ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓCopy To> ✤ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ .✤ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ٨٢ ٨٢ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:09:13 AR ٤ Movie ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ Voice Voice Recorder )ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﺯﺭ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( MEN E MOD ﻭﺿﻊ ) Voice Recorderﻣُﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ٨٤ ................................................................................................ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ٨٤ ....................................................................... ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ٨٥ .............................................................................................. ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ٨٥ ....................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ) Voice Playﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ(٨٦ .................................................. ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ٨٦ ........................................................................ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ٨٧ ......................................................................... ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ٨٨ ........................................................................... ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ٨٩ .......................................................................... .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ] Wﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ TﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮPhoto U ٤ E DELET HOLD DC IN MP3 .٢ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ Voice Recorder )ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE DISPLAY ◆ ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ/ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﻟﻌﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. Voice Recorder ٨٣ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:09:20 File Browser VP-X205 00994K AR 076~096.indd 83 AR ﻭﺿﻊ ) Voice Recorderﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( :ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ. .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ٢ ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. SWAV0001.WAV SWAV0001.WAV SWAV0001.WAV Stereo 8.0KHz 64Kbps 00:00:00/35:00:00 Stereo 8.0KHz 64Kbps Stereo 8.0KHz 64Kbps 00:00:00/35:00:00 00:00:00/35:00:00 .٢ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Voice Recorderﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ. ٣ Stereo 8.0KHz 64Kbps Stereo 8.0KHz 64Kbps 00:00:12/34:59:48 00:00:12/34:59:48 .٣ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ. ◆ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ > SWAV0001.WAV 2006/01/01 12:00:00 AM SWAV0001.WAV SWAV0001.WAV Stereo 8.0KHz 64Kbps 2006/01/01 12:00:00 AM 2006/01/01 12:00:00 AM 00:00:12/34:59:48 < ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ. ٤ .٤ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. SWAV0002.WAV SWAV0002.WAV SWAV0002.WAV Stereo 8.0KHz 64Kbps 00:00:12/34:59:48 Stereo 8.0KHz 64Kbps Stereo 8.0KHz 64Kbps 00:00:12/34:59:48 00:00:12/34:59:48 ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ. ✤ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Voice Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(. ٨٤ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:09:21 VP-X205 00994K AR 076~096.indd 84 AR ﻭﺿﻊ ) Voice Recorderﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( :ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺘﻲ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ. .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ٢ SWAV0004.WAV SWAV0004.WAV SWAV0004.WAV SWAV0004.WAV ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. Stereo 8.0KHz 64Kbps Stereo 8.0KHz 64Kbps 00:00:00/30:20:00 Stereo 8.0KHz 64Kbps Stereo 00:00:00/30:20:00 8.0KHz 64Kbps 00:00:00/30:20:00 00:00:00/30:20:00 .٢ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Voice Recorderﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ. .٣ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [PLAYﺃﻭ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Voice Playlistﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(. ٣ .٤ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. .٥ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. ◆ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘًﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ/ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ. ◆ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ/ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ً Play Play Play Play ٤ .٦ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ. ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ. ◆ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ٍ ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ،ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCDﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ. ✤ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺘﻲ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ/ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ✤ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ✤ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Voice Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(. 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:09:22 3/3 3/3 3/3 3/3 AM 2006/01/01 12:00:00 2006/01/01 12:00:00 AM 2006/01/01 12:36:25 12:00:00 2006/01/01 12:36:25 12:00:00 AM AM 2006/01/01 AM 2006/01/01 01:00:02 AM 2006/01/01 12:36:25 12:36:25 AM 01:00:02 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 01:00:02 01:00:02 AM AM OK OK OK OK Move Move Move Move 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3 AM 2006/01/01 12:00:00 2006/01/01 12:00:00 AM 2006/01/01 12:36:25 12:00:00 2006/01/01 12:36:25 12:00:00 AM AM 2006/01/01 AM 2006/01/01 01:00:02 AM 12:36:25 12:36:25 AM 2006/01/01 01:00:02 2006/01/01 01:00:02 AM 2006/01/01 01:00:02 AM Play Play Play Play ٦ OK OK OK OK 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Move Move Move Move 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3 SWAV0002.WAV SWAV0002.WAV 2006/01/01 12:36:25 AM SWAV0002.WAV 2006/01/01 12:36:25 AM SWAV0002.WAV Stereo 8.0KHz 64Kbps 2006/01/01 12:36:25 AM 2006/01/01 12:36:25 AM Stereo 8.0KHz 64Kbps 00:00:12/00:02:15 Stereo 8.0KHz 64Kbps Stereo 00:00:12/00:02:15 8.0KHz 64Kbps 00:00:12/00:02:15 00:00:12/00:02:15 11 11 11 11 Pause Pause Pause Pause OK OK OK OK List List List List Search Search Search Search ٨٥ VP-X205 00994K AR 076~096.indd 85 AR ﻭﺿﻊ ) Voice Recorderﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ) Voice Playﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ( ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ. ٢ .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. Stereo 8.0KHz 64Kbps 00:00:00/30:20:00 Stereo 64Kbps Stereo 8.0KHz 8.0KHz 64Kbps ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. .٢ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Voice Recorderﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ. 00:00:00/30:20:00 00:00:00/30:20:00 ٣ ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Voice Playlistﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(. ◆ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ > :<OKﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. >) <Multi Selectﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ( :ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. > ✔ < ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[PLAY >) <Allﻛﻞ( :ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ. >) <Cancelﺍﻟﻐﺎء( :ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ. 1 3/3 1 1 3/3 3/3 AM 2006/01/01 12:00:00 2006/01/0112:00:00 12:36:25AM AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 12:00:00 AM 2006/01/01 01:00:02AM AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 12:36:25 12:36:25 AM 2006/01/01 01:00:02 AM 2006/01/01 01:00:02 AM .٣ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [PLAYﺃﻭ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ .٤ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [DELETEﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCDﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ .ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. SWAV0004.WAV SWAV0004.WAV SWAV0004.WAV ٤ Play OK Move Play Play OK OK Move Move 1 1/3 1 1 1/3 1/3 AM 2006/01/01 12:00:00 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 12:00:00 12:00:00 AM AM Select OK Select Select OK OK All Cancel All All Move Cance l Cancel Move Move ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻔﻠﺔ. ✤ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ✤ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Voice Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(. ٨٦ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:09:24 VP-X205 00994K AR 076~096.indd 86 AR ﻭﺿﻊ ) Voice Recorderﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ) Voice Playﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ( ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ .ﻛﺬﺍ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ. .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. 1/3 ٣ ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. .٢ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Voice Recorderﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE 1 1/3 2006/01/01 12:00:00 1/3 1/3 AM 2006/01/01 12:36:25 12:00:00 AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 12:00:00 12:00:00 AM AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 01:00:02 12:36:25 AM AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 12:36:25 12:36:25 AM AM 2006/01/01 01:00:02 AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 01:00:02 01:00:02 AM AM ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ. .٣ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [PLAYﺃﻭ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. ◆ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Voice Playlistﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(. ◆ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. 1/3 ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ >) <Play Oneﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ( :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. >) <Play Allﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ( :ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﺍﻳ ًﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ. >) <Repeat Oneﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ( :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ. >) <Repeat Allﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ( :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ. .٦ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [MENUﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ◆ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. ◆ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ. ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ✤ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Voice Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(. 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:09:28 Play OK Move Play Play Play OK OK OK Move Move Move Voice Recorder Voice Recorder 1/3 1/3 Voice Voice Recorder Recorder 1/3 ٤ Play All .٤ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MENU ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ/ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Play modeﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(. .٥ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺯﺭ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. 1 11 Play All Play Play All All Exit MENU OK Exit Exit Exit MENU MEN U MENU OK OK OK ٥ 1/3 1/3 1/3 1/3 Repeat One 1 ٦ Exit MENU 1 11Select Exit Exit Exit MENU MEN U MENU Select Select Select OK OK OK OK Repeat One Move One Repeat Repeat One Move Move Move 1/3 1 1/3 12:00:00 1/3 1/3 AM 2006/01/01 12:36:25 12:00:00 AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 12:00:00 12:00:00 AM AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 01:00:02 12:36:25 AM AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 12:36:25 12:36:25 AM AM 2006/01/01 01:00:02 AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 01:00:02 01:00:02 AM AM 1 11 2006/01/01 Play OK Move Play Play Play OK OK OK Move Move Move ٨٧ VP-X205 00994K AR 076~096.indd 87 AR ﻭﺿﻊ ) Voice Recorderﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ) Voice Playﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ( ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩﺓ .ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ. .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. 1/3 ٣ ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. .٢ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Voice Recorderﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE 1/3 1/3 2006/01/01 12:00:00 1/3 AM 2006/01/0112:00:00 12:36:25AM AM 2006/01/01 12:00:00 AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 01:00:02 12:00:00 AM AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 12:36:25 AM AM 2006/01/01 12:36:25 2006/01/01 12:36:25 AM 2006/01/01 01:00:02 01:00:02 AM AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 01:00:02 AM Play ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ. .٣ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [PLAYﺃﻭ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. 1/3 ٤ ◆ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Voice Playlistﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(. ◆ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ. .٤ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MENU ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ /ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Lockﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ(. .٥ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ >) <Lockﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ( :ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. >) <Multi Selectﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ( :ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. < ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[PLAY > >) <Lock Allﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ( :ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ. >) <Unlock Allﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ( :ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ. ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ > < ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻔﻞ. ✤ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ✤ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Voice Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(. 1 ٥ OK Move OK OK OK Move Move Move Play Play Play Voice Recorder 1/3 VoiceRecorder Recorder 1/3 Voice 2006/01/01 Lock 1/3 AM Voice Recorder 12:00:00 2006/01/01 2006/01/0 006/01/01 6/01/01 12:3 12:36 12:36:25 :36:25 :36: 66:25 : AM A AM M 2006/01/01 12:00:00 12:00:00 AM 2006/01/01 Lock LockLock 2006/01/01 12:00:00 AM 2006/01/01 006/01/01 6 01:00:0 :00: 022 A AM A 01:00:02 Lock 2006/01/01 2006/01/0 006/01/01 6/01/01 12:3 12:36 12:36:25 :36:25 :36: 66:25 AM M Multi 2006/01/0 Select 2006/01/01 006/01/01 6/01/01 12:3 12:36 12:36:25 :36:25 :36: 66:25 :: A AM M Lock 2006/01/0 2006/01/01 006/01/01 6/01/01 12:3 12:36 12:36:25 :36:25 :36: 66:25 : A AM M Lock 2006/01/01 006/01/01 01:00:0 :00:02 02 AM A 01:00:02 Lock Select All 2006/01/01 006/01/01 66 01:00:0 :00: 22 A AM 01:00:02 Multi Multi Select 2006/01/01 006/01/01 6 01:00:0 :00:022 A AM 01:00:02 Multi Select Lock All Lock All OK Select MENU Exit Move Lock All OK Select MENU Exit Move OK Select MENU Exit Move OK Select MENU Exit Move 1/3 Voice Recorder 1/3 Voice Recorder Recorder 1/3 Voice Lock Voice Recorder 1/3 Lock LockLock 2006/01/01 006/01/01 6 01:00:0 :00:022 A AM M 01:00:02 Lock Multi Select Lock Lock 2006/01/01 006/01/01 6 01:00:0 :00:02 02 2A AM A M 01:00:02 Lock All 2006/01/01 006/01/01 6 01:00:0 :00: 2 AM M 01:00:02 Multi Select Select Multi 2006/01/01 006/01/01 6 01:00:0 :00:022 A AM M 01:00:02 MultiAll Select Lock Lock All OK Select MENU Exit Move Lock All Exit Exit Exit MENU MENU MENU Select Select Select OK OK OK 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:09:36 Move Move Move 1/3 1 1/3 1/3 2006/01/01 12:00:00 1/3 AM 11 1 2006/01/0112:00:00 12:36:25AM AM 2006/01/01 12:00:00 AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 01:00:02 12:00:00 AM AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 12:36:25 AM AM 2006/01/01 12:36:25 2006/01/01 12:36:25 AM 2006/01/01 01:00:02 01:00:02 AM AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 01:00:02 AM Play ٨٨ ٨٨ 11 1 OK Move OK OK OK Move Move Move Play Play Play VP-X205 00994K AR 076~096.indd 88 AR ﻭﺿﻊ ) Voice Recorderﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ) Voice Playﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ( ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ 1/3 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ. .١ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. .٢ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. 1/3 AM 2006/01/01 12:00:00 1 1/3 2006/01/01 12:36:25 AM 1 2006/01/01 12:00:00 1/3 AM 2006/01/01 2006/01/0101:00:02 12:00:00AM AM 2006/01/01 12:36:25 AM 2006/01/01 12:00:00 AM 2006/01/01 12:36:25 01:00:02 AM 2006/01/01 12:36:25 01:00:02 AM OK Play Move 2006/01/01 01:00:02 AM 1 ٤ ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. .٣ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Voice Recorderﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE Play Play ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ. .٤ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [PLAYﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. ◆ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Voice Playlistﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(. ◆ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. ٥ .٦ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. ٦ Exit MENU Select OK 1/3 1/3 1/3 Move All Exit Exit MENU MENU MENU Select OK Select OK Select OK All Move All AllMove Move OK Select 1/3MENU Exit Move Voice Recorder Exit 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:09:42 OK 1/3 Voice Recorder 1/3 Voice Recorder 1/3 Voice Recorder Multi Select All Multi Select Multi MoveSelect OK Select MENU Exit All All Select Multi OK Select MENU Exit AllMove OK Select MENU Exit Move 1/3 Exit ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ،ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ. ✤ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ >) <Copy Toﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ( ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ. ✤ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ✤ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Voice Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(. OK Move Move Voice OK Play 1/3 Move Recorder .٥ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [MENUﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ/ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Copy Toﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ(. ◆ > :<OKﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. ◆ >) <Multi Selectﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ( :ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. > ✔ < ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[PLAY ◆ >) <Allﻛﻞ( :ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ. 1 MENU Copying file(s)... Voice Recorder 1/3 DPOF SWAVE0001.WAV Voice Recorder 1/3 Copying file(s)... 1/3 Voice Recorder DPOF SWAVE0001.WAV Copying file(s)... Press OK to cancel. DPOF SWAVE0001.WAV Copying file(s)... DPOF SWAVE0001.WAV Cancel Press OK to cancel. Press OK to cancel. OK Select Move Cancel Press OK to cancel. Cancel Exit Exit MENU MENU Select Cancel Select OK OK Move Move Exit MENU Select OK Move ٨٩ VP-X205 00994K AR 076~096.indd 89 Movie AR ٥ Photo ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ Browser ﻭﺿﻊ File Browser ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ( )ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ( ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ٩١ ........................................................................ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ٩٢ ......................................................................... ﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ٩٣ ......................................................................................... ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ٩٤ ........................................................................... ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ٩٥ ............................................................................. ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ W MP3 ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ Tﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺯﺭ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ◆ ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ/ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﻟﻌﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. U MEN E ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ) File Browserﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ( ٥ MOD E HOLD DC IN Voice Recorder DELET DISPLAY .٢ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) File Browserﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE File Browser ٩٠ ٩٠ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:09:47 VP-X205 00994K AR 076~096.indd 90 AR ( )ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒFile Browser ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ DCIM DCIM MISC DCIM MISC MUSIC MISC MUSIC VIDEO MUSIC VIDEO DCIM VOICE VIDEO VOICE MISC VOICE OK Play Move MUSIC OK Play Move MoveVIDEOOK Play VOICE Move OK ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ 1/5 1/5 1/5 .( ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔWAV ﺃﻭMP3 ﺃﻭJPEG ﺃﻭAVI ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻅ )ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ٢ 1/5 .( )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢMovie Record ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ .[MODE] )ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭFile Browser ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ.٢ Play .( )ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒFile Browser ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ٣ /DCIM /DCIM 100SSDVC /DCIM 100SSDVC 100SSDVC ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ/ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ.٣ .[ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ /DCIM 100SSDVC Move Move Move Move OK OK Play Play Play OK Play OK .◆ ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ 1/4 1/4 1/4 . ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ.٤ /DCIM/100SSDVC /DCIM/100SSDVC DCAM0001.JPG /DCIM/100SSDVC DCAM0001.JPG 1/4 DCAM0002.JPG DCAM0001.JPG DCAM0002.JPG DCAM0003.JPG DCAM0002.JPG /DCIM/100SSDVC DCAM0003.JPG DCAM0004.JPG DCAM0003.JPG DCAM0004.JPG DCAM0001.JPG DCAM0004.JPG OK Play MoveDCAM0002.JPG OK Play Move OK Play MoveDCAM0003.JPG DCAM0004.JPG 100-0001 100-0001 OK Play Move 720X480 100-0001 720X480 720X480 100-0001 ٤ 01 01 01 720X480 01 ٩١ .ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ/ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ.١ 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 12:00AM 2006/01/01 Sepia Sepia Sepia 12:00AM 2006/01/01 Sepia VP-X205 00994K AR 076~096.indd 91 [ ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ . ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ، )ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞW(WIDE) [ ﺇﻟﻰW/T] ✤ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ . ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ،ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ ً [✤ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:09:48 ٥ AR ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ) File Browserﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ( ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ 1/5 1/5 ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ )ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ AVIﺃﻭ JPEGﺃﻭ MP3ﺃﻭ (WAVﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ. .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ٢ 1/5 1/5 ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. 1/5 .٢ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) File Browserﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) File Browserﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(. Play 1/5 1/5 ٤ DCIM MISC DCIM MUSIC VIDEO MISC DCIM VOICE MUSIC MISC DCIM VIDEO MISC OK Play MoveMUSIC VOICE VIDEO MUSIC VIDEO OK Play MoveVOICE VOICEOK 1/5 1/5 1/5 1/5 Play Move OK DCIM DCIM .٣ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. Select Select Select 1/5 Select .٤ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [DELETEﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ .LCDﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ > :<OKﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. >) <Multi Selectﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ( :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. > ✔ < ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[PLAY >) <Allﻛﻞ( :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ. >) <Cancelﺍﻟﻐﺎء( :ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ. ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [W/Tﺇﻟﻰ )) W(WIDEﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ. ✤ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻔﻠﺔ. ✤ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻘﻔﻞ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻔﻠﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ. ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ. ✤ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ً ٩٢ DCIM 1/5 1/5 DCIM 1/5 DCIM DCIM Select Select Select Select 1/4 OK OK Move Move OK Move OK Move MISC 1/4 MUSIC 1/4 VIDEO MISC 1/4 VOICE MUSIC MISC VIDEO MUSIC MISC VOICE VIDEO Play Move MUSICOKOKPlay Move VOICE VIDEO OK VOICE Play Move OK Play Move Play Play Play Play OK OK OK OK 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:09:50 DCIM DCIM 1/5 ◆ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ. Move Move Move Move Move VP-X205 00994K AR 076~096.indd 92 AR ( )ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒFile Browser ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ١ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ 1/5 1/5 1/5 DCIM DCIM DCIM MISC MISC MUSIC MISC MUSIC VIDEO MUSIC VIDEO VOICE VIDEO VOICE VOICE Move Move Move ٢ .( )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢMovie Record ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ .[MODE] )ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭFile Browser ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ.٢ OK OK OK OK .( )ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒFile Browser ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ Play Play Play 1/4 1/4 1/4 /DCIM/100SSDVC /DCIM/100SSDVC /DCIM/100SSDVC DCAM0001.JPG DCAM0001.JPG DCAM0001.JPG DCAM0002.JPG DCAM0002.JPG DCAM0002.JPG DCAM0003.JPG DCAM0003.JPG DCAM0003.JPG DCAM0004.JPG DCAM0004.JPG DCAM0004.JPG ٣ 1/4 File Browser 1/4 File 1/4 File Browser Browser /DCIM/100SSDVC Lock /DCIM/100SSDVC Lock /DCIM/100SSDVC DCAM0001.JPG Lock Lock DCAM0001.JPG DCAM0001.JPG D AM0002 JPG DCAM0002.JPG PG G Lock D DCAM0002.JPG AM0002 PG G Lock Multi Select D DCAM0002.JPG AM0002 JPG PG G DCAM0003.JPG AM0003 JPG Multi Select DCAM0003.JPG D AM0003 JPG G Multi Select Lock All DCAM0003.JPG D AM0003 G DCAM0001.JPG AM0001 JPG Lock DCAM0001.JPG D AM0001 G Lock All All DCAM0001.JPG D AM0001 JPG JPG G ٤ Move Move Move Move Move Move OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK Play Play Play Select Select Select MENU MENU MENU MENU OK OK OK OK .[ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ.٣ .ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ/◆ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ .[MENU] ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ.٤ .(< )ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝLock> ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ/ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ .[ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ،ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ/ ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ.٥ . ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ:(< )ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝLock> .[ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ:(< )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩMulti Select> .[PLAY] ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ.> < ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ . ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ:(< )ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻞLock All> . ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ:(< )ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻞUnlock All> ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ Exit Exit Exit 1/4 1/4 1/4 /DCIM/100SSDVC /DCIM/100SSDVC /DCIM/100SSDVC DCAM0001.JPG DCAM0001.JPG DCAM0001.JPG DCAM0002.JPG DCAM0002.JPG DCAM0002.JPG DCAM0003.JPG DCAM0003.JPG DCAM0003.JPG DCAM0004.JPG DCAM0004.JPG DCAM0004.JPG Move Move Move .ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ/ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ.١ Play Play Play ٥ [ ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ .ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ .ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ > < ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ . ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ، )ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞW(WIDE) [ ﺇﻟﻰW/T] ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ . ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ،ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ ً [ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ✤ ✤ ✤ ✤ ٩٣ VP-X205 00994K AR 076~096.indd 93 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:09:54 AR ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ) File Browserﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ( ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ١ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ. .١ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. .٢ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. 1/5 1/5 1/5 ٣ ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. .٣ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) File Browserﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) File Browserﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(. Play Play Play OK OK OK OK .٤ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. ◆ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ. ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ،ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ. ✤ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ >) <Copy Toﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ( ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ. ✤ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [W/Tﺇﻟﻰ )) W(WIDEﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ. ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ. ✤ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ً Move Move Move 1/4 1/4 1/4 /DCIM/100SSDVC /DCIM/100SSDVC /DCIM/100SSDVC DCAM0001.JPG DCAM0001.JPG DCAM0002.JPG DCAM0001.JPG DCAM0002.JPG DCAM0003.JPG DCAM0002.JPG DCAM0003.JPG DCAM0004.JPG DCAM0003.JPG DCAM0004.JPG DCAM0004.JPG ٤ .٥ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MENU ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ /ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Copy Toﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ(. .٦ﺣﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. ◆ > :<OKﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. ◆ >) <Multi Selectﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ( :ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. > ✔ < ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[PLAY ◆ >) <Allﻛﻞ( :ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ. DCIM DCIM DCIM MISC MISC MUSIC MISC MUSIC VIDEO MUSIC VIDEO VOICE VIDEO VOICE VOICE Play Play Play Play Play Play OK OK OK OK OK OK OK ٥ Exit Exit Exit 1/4 File Browser 1/4 File Browser 1/4 File Browser /DCIM/100SSDVC Copy To /DCIM/100SSDVC Copy To /DCIM/100SSDVC DCAM0001.JPG Copy To DCAM0001.JPG OK DCAM0002.JPG DDCAM0001.JPG AM0002 JPG PG G OK DCAM0002.JPG D AM0002 JPG PG G OK Select Multi DCAM0003.JPG D G D AM0003 DCAM0002.JPG AM0002 JPG JPG PG G Multi Select DCAM0003.JPG D AM0003 JPG G All Multi D Select DCAM0001.JPG AM0001 G DCAM0003.JPG D AM0003 JPG JPG G All D DCAM0001.JPG AM0001 JPG G All D DCAM0001.JPG AM0001 JPG G MENU MENU MENU MENU ٦ Move Move Move Move Move Move Select Select Select OK OK OK OK Move Move Move File Browser File Browser File Browser Copying file(s)... Copying file(s)... DPOFfile(s)... DCAM0001.JPG Copying DPOF DCAM0001.JPG DPOF DCAM0001.JPG OK OK OKPress OK to cancel. Exit Exit Exit MENU MENU MENU MENU Press OK to cancel. Press OK to cancel. Cancel Cancel Cancel Select Select Select OK OK OK OK Move Move Move ٩٤ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:09:59 VP-X205 00994K AR 076~096.indd 94 AR ( )ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒFile Browser ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ١ DCIM DCIM DCIM MISC DCIM MISC MISC MUSIC MISC MUSIC MUSIC VIDEO MUSIC VIDEO VIDEO VOICE VIDEO VOICE VOICE VOICEOK Move OK Play Move Play Move Move Move Move Move Move 1/5 1/5 1/5 1/5 ٢ .[MODE] )ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭFile Browser ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ.٢ Play Play Play Play Play Play OK OK OK OK OK OK .( )ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒFile Browser ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ٣ .[ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ.٣ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ/◆ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ .ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ Play Play Play Play Play Play OK OK OK OK OK OK 1/13 File Browser 1/13 FileBrowser Browser 1/13 File 1/13 File Browser /DCIM/100SSDVC File Info. /DCIM/100SSDVC /DCIM/100SSDVC File Info. File Info. DCAM0001.JPG /DCIM/100SSDVC File Info. DCAM0001.JPG DCAM0001.JPG OK DCAM0001.JPG D DCAM0002.JPG AM0002 JPG PG G OK DCAM0002.JPG OK D DCAM0002.JPG AM0002JPG JPG PG D AM0003 AM0002 JPG PG GG DCAM0003.JPG OK DCAM0002.JPG DD AM0002 JPG PG GG DCAM0003.JPG D AM0003 JPG DCAM0003.JPG D AM0003 JPG GG DCAM0004.JPG D AM0004JPG JPG DCAM0003.JPG D AM0003 GG DCAM0004.JPG D AM0004JPG JPG DCAM0004.JPG D AM0004 GG DCAM0004.JPG D AM0004 JPG G OK Select MENU Exit Move Move Move Move Select Select Select OK OK OK Close: :OK OK Close OK OK OK .[MENU] ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ.٤ .(< )ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒFile Info.> ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ/ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ . ﺍﺿﻐﻄﻌﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ.٥ .◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺣﺠﻤﻪ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻪ ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ Exit Exit Exit Select Close :MENU OK Exit MENUExit Select MENU Exit Select Select MENU Exit OK ٤ MENU MENU MENU 1/4 File Browser 1/4 FileBrowser Browser 1/4 File 1/4 File Browser DCAM0001.JPG File Info. DCAM0001.JPG DCAM0001.JPG Size 92805 bytes FileInfo. Info. File DCAM0001.JPG Size 92805bytes bytes File Info.2006/01/01 Size 92805 Date OK Size 92805 bytes Date 2006/01/01 Date 2006/01/01 12:00:00 AM OK OK Date 2006/01/01 OKLocked 12:00:00 12:00:00 AM AM No AM Locked 12:00:00 No Locked No Locked No Close : OK Move Move Move Move .ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ/ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ.١ .( )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢMovie Record ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 /DCIM/100SSDVC /DCIM/100SSDVC /DCIM/100SSDVC DCAM0001.JPG /DCIM/100SSDVC DCAM0001.JPG DCAM0001.JPG DCAM0002.JPG DCAM0001.JPG DCAM0002.JPG DCAM0002.JPG DCAM0003.JPG DCAM0002.JPG DCAM0003.JPG DCAM0003.JPG DCAM0004.JPG DCAM0003.JPG DCAM0004.JPG DCAM0004.JPG OK DCAM0004.JPG Move OK Play Move Play Move Move Move Move Move Move ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﻪ ﻭﺣﺠﻤﻪ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻪ ٥ . ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ.٦ [ ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ . ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻘﻂ.✤ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ . ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ،ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ ً [✤ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ٩٥ VP-X205 00994K AR 076~096.indd 95 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:10:05 MP3 AR ٦ Voice Recorder ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ System ﻭﺿﻊ System ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ) Settingsﺿﺒﻂ Settings .١ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ File ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ Browser W ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ T ﺯﺭ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( U MEN E MOD E DELET HOLD DC IN .٢ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ System Settings )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE System Settings ٩٦ ٩٦ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:10:09 DISPLAY ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ٩٧ ......................................................................................... ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ٩٧ .......................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ٩٨ ................................................................................. USB ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ٩٨ ..........................................................................USB ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ٩٩ ......................................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ٩٩ ..................................................................... ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ١٠٠ ................................................................................ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ١٠١ ..................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ١٠٢ ...............................................................................LCD ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ١٠٢ ............................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ١٠٣ ........................................................................ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ/ﻭﻗﺖ١٠٤ .................................................................................. ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ/ﻭﻗﺖ ١٠٤ .......................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ١٠٥ ....................................................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ١٠٦ ........................................................................ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ/ﻭﻗﺖ ١٠٧ ................................................................. ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ١٠٨ ........................................................................................ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ١٠٨ ........................................................................ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺪء١٠٩ ............................................................................ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ١١٠ ..................................................... ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ١١١ .................................................................................. ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ١١٢ ........................................................................ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ١١٣ ......................................................... ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ١١٤ ................................................................ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ١١٥ ............................................................................USB ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ١١٥ ........................................................................ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ١١٦ .................................................PictBridge ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ١١٧ .............................................................. PC Cam ٦ ◆ ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ /ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﻟﻌﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. VP-X205 00994K AR 076~096.indd 96 AR ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ(. System Settings TYPE Settings System Storage Type TYPE .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. Ver. Ver. Internal Storage Type System Settings External Internal ٣ TYPE .٢ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE External Storage Type ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) The System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(. Select .٣ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ /ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Storage Typeﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ(. .٤ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﺗﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ. ✤ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ >) <Internalﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ(. ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ. ً ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﺍ ✤ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ً ✤ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ .ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﺎﻥ ٣٢ ،٣١ OK Select OK Select OK Internal Move External Move Move System Settings ٤ TYPE Settings System StorageTYPEType Ver. Ver. Internal Storage Type System Settings External Internal ◆ >) <Internalﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ( :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ. ◆ >) <Externalﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ( :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ )ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ .(SD/MMC .٥ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ،ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE Ver. Ver. TYPE External Storage Type Select Select ٥ OK OK Internal Move External Move STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 Select OK Move STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 720i F 720i Recording... STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 Recording... F 720i F Sepia Sepia S Recording... 12:00AM 2006/01/01 S 12:00AM 2006/01/01 S Sepia 12:00AM 2006/01/01 ٩٧ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:11:33 VP-X205 00994K AR 097~122.indd 97 AR System Settings ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ :ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ USB TYPE USB Mode Mass Storage PictBridge ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ USB ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ) Sports Camcorderﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ( ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ،USBﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ USBﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ. .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. PC-Cam Select ٣ OK System Settings TYPE USB Mode Mass Storage PictBridge .٢ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE PC-Cam ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) The System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(. .٣ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ/ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <USB Modeﻭﺿﻊ .(USB .٤ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. Mass Storage )ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ( PictBridge PC-Cam ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ١١٥ Select ٤ OK Move System Settings TYPE USB Mode Mass Storage PictBridge PC-Cam Select OK Move System Settings TYPE ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ،ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) PictBridgeﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓً(، ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ) (SD/MMCﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﻭﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ .ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ١١٦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻛﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﺪﺭﺩﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ .ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ١١٧ Move USB Mode Mass Storage PictBridge PC-Cam Select OK Move ٩٨ ٩٨ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:11:35 VP-X205 00994K AR 097~122.indd 98 AR ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﺃﻭ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ. .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. ٣ System Settings System Settings RGB RGB File No. File No. Series Series Reset Reset .٢ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) The System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(. .٣ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ/ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <File No.ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(. .٤ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. ﻼ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ◆ >) <Seriesﻣﺘﺎﻟﻲ( :ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻ ً ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ. ◆ >) <Resetﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ( :ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻪ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ).(٠٠٠١-١٠٠ Select Select ٤ OK OK Move Move System Settings System Settings RGB RGB File No. File No. Series Series Reset Reset Select Select OK OK Move Move .٥ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ،ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ [ ✤ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ >) <File No.ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ( ﻋﻠﻰ >) <Seriesﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻲ( ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ .ﻭﻳﻴﺴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ٩٩ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:11:36 VP-X205 00994K AR 097~122.indd 99 AR ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ:ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ System Settings RGB Format System Settings Internal External System Settings Format System Settings Internal Format Move Format OK Select External Internal Internal External External System Settings Move OK System Settings Internal External System Settings Format System Settings Internal Format Move Format OK Select External Internal Internal External External OK RGB RGB RGB RGB RGB RGB Select OK Cancel Cancel OK Select Move OK Select Move System Settings System Settings Internal External System Settings Formatting Format System Settings external memory... Formatting Internal Format Formatting external memory... Move Format OK Select External external memory... Internal Internal External External Move OK Select Move Move OK Select Select ٤ .(< )ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔFormat> ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ/ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ.٣ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ،ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ/ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ.٤ .[]ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ Select Formatting Format external memory... .[MODE] )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭSystem Settings ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ.٢ .( )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡThe System Settings ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ RGB Format format the external memory, System Settings Internal all files will be erased? External System Settings AreFormat you sure you want to� System SettingsOK format the external memory, Cancel Arefiles youwill sure want to� Internal all beyou erased? Format Are youthe sure you want to� format external memory, OK Move Select Format External format memory, Internal all filesthe willexternal be erased? Internal OK all files will be erased? External Cancel External OK OK .ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ/ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ.١ RGB System Settings OK .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ .( )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢMovie Record ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ OK Select Move RGB Move Select Are you sureOKyou want to� Move ٣ RGB Select OK Select Move Format OK Move Select Move ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ RGB RGB RGB RGB RGB VP-X205 00994K AR 097~122.indd 100 . ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ:(< )ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲInternal> ◆ . ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ:(< )ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲExternal> ◆ .ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ (ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ/< )ﺍﻟﻐﺎء( ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰCancel> < ﺃﻭOK> ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ .ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ .[MODE] ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ، ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ.٥ [ ] ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ .✤ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ [ ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ.✤ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ .ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ .(< )ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲExternal> ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ،✤ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ١٠٠ ١٠٠ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:11:38 AR ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. ٤ RGB ١ .٢ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(. .٣ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ/ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Memory Spaceﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ(. System Settings ٢ Memory Space 3MB/983MB 0MB/243MB Internal External Move ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ١ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ٢ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ .٤ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ. .٥ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ. ً ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﺍ ✤ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ً ✤ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ >) <Externalﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ(. ✤ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ .VP-X210L ١٠١ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:11:41 VP-X205 00994K AR 097~122.indd 101 AR ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCD ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCDﻟﻠﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻋﻦ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ. System Settings .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. 24 12 RGB LCD Brightness ٣ System Settings 24 30% RGB 12 LCD Brightness .٢ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE Set OK Adjust Set OK Adjust ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(. .٣ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ/ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <LCD Brightnessﺳﻄﻮﻉ(. ٤ 30% Move Move System Settings 24 12 RGB LCD Brightness .٤ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. ◆ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ. ◆ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCDﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ٪٠ﺇﻟﻰ .٪١٠٠ System Settings 24 60% RGB 12 LCD Brightness Set OK Adjust Set OK Adjust 60% Move Move .٥ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ،ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ. ً ✤ ﻳﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCDﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ✤ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCDﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ✤ ﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCDﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ. ١٠٢ ١٠٢ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:11:41 VP-X205 00994K AR 097~122.indd 102 AR ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCD ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCDﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﻒ. .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. ٣ 24 24 12 12 .٢ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE Set Set OK OK ٤ 24 24 12 Adjust Adjust Move Move System Settings System Settings 12 .٤ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ،LCDﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. ◆ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCDﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ٪٠ﺇﻟﻰ .٪١٠٠ LCD Colour LCD Colour 50% 50% ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(. .٣ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ/ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <LCD Colourﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(. System Settings System Settings LCD Colour LCD Colour 10% 10% Set Set OK OK Adjust Adjust Move Move .٥ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ،ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE ١٠٣ ١٠٣ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:11:42 VP-X205 00994K AR 097~122.indd 103 AR ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ/ﻭﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ/ﻭﻗﺖ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ/ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. ٣ System Settings 24 24 .٢ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE 12 12 RGB RGB Date/Time Set ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) The System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(. .٣ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ/ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Date/Time Setﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ/ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. .٤ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ. 2006 01 01 12 : 00 AM Set ٤ System Settings 24 24 12 12 RGB RGB Date/Time Set 2006 01 01 .٥ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ/ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ،ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ. ◆ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ. ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ) Yearﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ( ﻭ) Monthﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ( ﻭ) Dateﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ﻭ) Hourﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ( ﻭ) Minuteﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ( ﻭ) AM/PMﺹ/ﻡ(. OK OK Move 12 : 00 AM Set OK OK Adjust Move .٦ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ. .٧ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ،ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ١٠٧ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ >) <Date/Timeﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ/ﻭﻗﺖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ .LCD ✤ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﺎﻡ .٢٠٣٧ ١٠٤ ١٠٤ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:11:43 VP-X205 00994K AR 097~122.indd 104 AR ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ/ﻭﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ. .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. System Settings ٣ M M ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(. Select ٤ ◆ > :<YY/MM/DDﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ) Yearﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ() Month /ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ() Date /ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ(. ◆ > :<DD/MM/YYﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ) Dateﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ() Month /ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ() Year /ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ(. ◆ > :<MM/DD/YYﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ) Monthﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ() Date /ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ() Year /ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ(. OK OK DD/MM/YY Move MM/DD/YY Move System Settings M M .٤ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. 24 12 Select .٢ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE .٣ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ/ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Date Formatﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(. 24 12 Date Format System Settings YY/MM/DD DD/MM/YY Date Format MM/DD/YY YY/MM/DD 24 12 Date Format System Settings YY/MM/DD DD/MM/YY Date Format MM/DD/YY YY/MM/DD 24 12 Select Select OK OK DD/MM/YY Move MM/DD/YY Move .٥ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ،ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE ١٠٥ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:11:45 VP-X205 00994K AR 097~122.indd 105 AR ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ/ﻭﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ. .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ٣ ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. System Settings System Settings M 24 M 24 12 Time Format 12Time HourFormat 12 12 24 Hour Hour 24 Hour .٢ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE Select Select ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(. ٤ .٣ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ/ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Time Formatﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(. .٤ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. Move Move OK OK System Settings System Settings M 24 M 24 12 Time Format 12Time HourFormat 12 12 24 Hour Hour 24 Hour Select Select OK OK Move Move ◆ > 12) <Hour 12ﺳﺎﻋﺔ( :ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ١٢ﺳﺎﻋﺔ. ◆ > 24) <Hour 24ﺳﺎﻋﺔ( :ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ٢٤ﺳﺎﻋﺔ. .٥ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ،ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE ١٠٦ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:11:46 VP-X205 00994K AR 097~122.indd 106 AR ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ/ﻭﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ/ﻭﻗﺖ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ .LCD .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. System Settings System Settings ٣ M M M ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. .٢ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE Select Select ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(. ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ >) <Offﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( :ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ. >) <Dateﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ( :ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ. >) <Timeﻭﻗﺖ( :ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ. >) <Date/Timeﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ/ﻭﻗﺖ( :ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ. .٥ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ،ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE Move Move System Settings System Settings M M M .٣ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ/ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Date/Timeﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ/ﻭﻗﺖ(. .٤ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. Date/Time Date/Time Off Off Date Date Time Time OK OK OK ٤ Select Select Move Move STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 Recording... Recording... Sepia Sepia 12 12 24 1224 24 Date/Time Date/Time Date Date Time Time Date/Time Date/Time OK OK OK ٥ 12 12 24 1224 24 720i 720i 720i FF F SS S 12:00AM 2006.01.01 12:00AM 2006.01.01 ◆ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ/ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movieﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺃﻭ ) Photoﺻﻮﺭﺓ(. ١٠٧ ١٠٧ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:11:48 VP-X205 00994K AR 097~122.indd 107 AR ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ .ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ،ﻳُﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ. .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. System Settings ٣ M System Settings Beep Sound M .٢ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE Off ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(. .٣ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ/ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Beep Soundﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ(. ٤ Select OK Move Select OK Move System Settings M System Settings Beep Sound M .٤ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. ◆ >) <Onﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ. ◆ >) <Offﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ. On Beep Sound Off On On Beep Sound Off On Off Select OK Move Select OK Move .٥ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ،ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ [ ✤ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ >) <Beep Soundﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺘﻲ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ/ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ١٠٨ ١٠٨ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:11:49 VP-X205 00994K AR 097~122.indd 108 AR ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺪء ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. System Settings ٣ DEMO DEMO Previous Mode ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(. ٤ DEMO ◆ >) <Movie Modeﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ) Movie Modeﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(. ◆ >) <Previous Modeﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ( :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ. Select OK Move Select OK Move System Settings DEMO .٤ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. M Movie Mode Start-up Previous Mode Movie Mode .٢ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE .٣ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ/ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Start-upﺑﺪء(. SystemMSettings Start-up SystemMSettings Start-up M Movie Mode Start-up Previous Mode Movie Mode Previous Mode Select OK Move Select OK Move .٥ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ،ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ [ ✤ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) start-upﺑﺪء( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ١٠٩ ١٠٩ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:11:50 VP-X205 00994K AR 097~122.indd 109 AR ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ(. ٣ .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. System Settings Ver. ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. DEMO Reset M OK .٢ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(. Select OK Move .٣ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ/ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Resetﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. ◆ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ. ] ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ [ ✤ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ،ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ(. ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ [ ✤ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ >) <Date/Time Setﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ/ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(. ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ١٠٤ ١١٠ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:11:51 VP-X205 00994K AR 097~122.indd 110 AR ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. ٣ TYPE TYPE Ver. Ver. .٢ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(. .٣ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ/ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >.<Language ٤ TYPE TYPE Ver. Ver. .٤ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. ◆ / Русский/ Polski/ Nederlands/ Italiano/ Deutsch/ Português/ Français/ Español /English ) Iran/ﺍﻳﺮﺍﻧﻲ() Arab /ﻋﺮﺑﻲ(Svenska /Українська /ไทย/ Magyar / / .٥ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ،ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE ١١١ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:11:53 VP-X205 00994K AR 097~122.indd 111 AR ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ >) <Auto Shut offﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻁ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ. .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. ٣ TYPE TYPE Ver. Ver. System Settings System Settings DEMO Auto Shut off OffAuto Shut off DEMO 5Off Minutes 5 Minutes .٢ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(. .٣ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ/ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ِ>) <Auto Shut offﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(. Select Select ٤ TYPE TYPE .٤ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. ◆ >) <Offﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( :ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ >) <Auto Shut offﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(. ◆ > 5) <Minutes 5ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ( :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ٥ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ. Ver. Ver. OK OK Move Move System Settings System Settings DEMO Auto Shut off Auto Shut off Off 5Off Minutes DEMO 5 Minutes Select Select OK OK Move Move .٥ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ،ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ >) <Auto Shut offﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ >) <Auto Shut Offﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ. ✤ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ >) <Auto Shut offﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ) System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(. ١١٢ ١١٢ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:11:54 VP-X205 00994K AR 097~122.indd 112 AR ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ:ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ . )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ( ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔDemonstration ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ System Settings System Settings Ver. TYPE Demonstration Ver. TYPE System Settings Demonstration Off DEMO DEMO DEMO Ver. Off 5Demonstration Minutes 5 Minutes Play Now Off Play Now 5 Minutes Move Play Now Move Move OK Select Select OK Select DEMO DEMO Off 5Demonstration Minutes 5 Minutes Off Play Now Play Now 5 Minutes Move Play Now Move Move .( )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡSystem Settings ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ٤ .(< )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲDemonstartion> ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ/ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ.٣ TYPE Select OK Select OK OK .( )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢMovie Record ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ .[MODE] )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭSystem Settings ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ.٢ OK Ver. .ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ/ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ.١ TYPE System Settings System Settings Ver. TYPE Demonstration Ver. TYPE System Settings Demonstration Off DEMO ٣ Select STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY 00:00:00/00:40:05 Functions 1. Digital Camcorder Functions 00:00:00/00:40:05 STBY DigitalCamcorder Camera 1.2.Digital Functions MP3 Player 2.3.Digital Camera 1. Digital Camcorder Stereo Audio Recorder 3.4.MP3 Player 2. Digital Camera PC-Camera 4.5.Stereo Audio Recorder 3.6.MP3 Player Data Storage 5. PC-Camera 4. Stereo Audio Recorder 6. Data Storage 5. PC-Camera 6. Data Storage ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ،ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ/ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ.٤ .[]ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ .( )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲDemonstration ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ:(< )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑOff> ◆ . ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ٥ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ( ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥDemonstration ﻟﺒﺪء ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ: ( ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ5) <5 Minutes> ◆ . )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭDemonstration ﻟﺒﺪء ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ:(< )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥPlay Now> ◆ [ ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ .( )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮVideo Record ﻓﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ،( )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲDemonstration ✤ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ١١٣ VP-X205 00994K AR 097~122.indd 113 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:11:55 AR ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ. .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. .٢ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(. ٣ System Settings TYPE Ver. DEMO Version Info Samsung Elec. Co. LTD S/W 1.00 Feb 16 2006 00:20:10 Syscon 1.00 Feb 17 2006 08:53:39 Move .٣ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ/ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <Version Infoﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ(. ◆ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. .٤ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ،ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE ١١٤ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:11:57 VP-X205 00994K AR 097~122.indd 114 AR ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ :ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ USB ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ. ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ .USB ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ! USB ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ >) <USB Modeﻭﺿﻊ (USBﻋﻠﻰ >) <Mass Storageﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ( ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ٩٨ MMC/SD .١ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USB .٢ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. USB USB .٣ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USBﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. .٤ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. MMC/SD MMC/SD .٥ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ،ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ .USB ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USBﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ. ✤ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ USBﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭ USBﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ/ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ١١٥ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:11:59 VP-X205 00994K AR 097~122.indd 115 AR ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ :ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ USB ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ PictBridge ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USBﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ .PictBridge ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ PictBridge )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ( .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. USB .٢ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE .٣ .٤ USB USB MMC/SD ◆ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ٠١ :ﺇﻟﻰ ٣٠ System SystemSettings Settings ٤ MMC/SD .٥ .٦ .٧ MMC/SD ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ/ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <USB Modeﻭﺿﻊ .(USB ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ > <PictBridgeﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. ﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ PictBridgeﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ .USB ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ/ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻪ. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ. .٨ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ. .٩ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ،ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ .USB ] ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ [ ✤ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ PictBridgeﻓﻘﻂ. ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ،ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ. ✤ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ،ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﺸﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ JPEGﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ. ✤ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ،ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ،ﻟﻨﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ. TYPE TYPE USB USB Mode Mode Mass Mass Storage Storage PictBridge PictBridge PC-Cam PC-Cam Select Select ٧ OK OK Move Move 100-0001 100-0001 01 01 Print Print OK OK Copies Copies Search Search ١١٦ ١١٦ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:12:01 VP-X205 00994K AR 097~122.indd 116 System Settings TYPE USB Mode Mass Storage AR PictBridge ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ :ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ USB PC-Cam Select ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ PC Cam ﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﺪﺭﺩﺷﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ ،ﻓﻀ ً ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ. ٣ System Settings TYPE USB Mode ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ! ◆ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) PC Camﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ( ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ .DV Driver .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. OK Move Mass Storage PictBridge ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ١٢٤ PC-Cam ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( Select .٢ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ) System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MODE 4٤ ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) System Settingsﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(. OK Move System Settings TYPE USB Mode .٣ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ/ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >) <USB Modeﻭﺿﻊ .(USB .٤ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ > <PC-Camﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. .٥ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. .٦ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USBﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. .٧ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻛﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﺜﻞ .Windows Messenger Mass Storage PictBridge PC-Cam Select ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ .USB OK Move System Settings TYPE ◆ ﺗﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ .PC Camﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ. USB Mode USB .٨ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ،ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ .USB MMC/SD ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ .DV Driverﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ١٢٤ ✤ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ DV Driverﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ .USBﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ١٢٤ ✤ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻪ. ✤ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ Microsoft Windows 98SEﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ .PC Cam Mass Storage PictBridge ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USB PC-Cam Select OK Move USB USB MMC/SD MMC/SD 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:12:03 ١١٧ ١١٧ VP-X205 00994K AR 097~122.indd 117 AR ٧ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ١١٩ ...................................................... ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ١١٩ ................................. ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ١٢٠ ..................................................................... ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻲ ١٢٠ .................................... ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ١٢١ ............................................................. ◆ ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ /ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ١١٨ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:12:04 VP-X205 00994K AR 097~122.indd 118 ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ: ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ AR ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﺎﺗﺎﻟﻤﺒﻬﺠﺔ .ﻭﺳﻮﺍء ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺰﺣﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﻴﺪ ﺃﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ. T MENU MODE ١ DELETE HOLD ◆ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ. W DISPLAY DC IN .١ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ﺯﺭ ] ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ/ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ [ .٢ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ/ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ. ◆ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ. ◆ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ. ٣ ٩٠ﺩﺭﺟﺔ )ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ( .٣ﺃﺩﺭ ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ. ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ. ◆ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ٩٠ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ً .٤ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ/ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ. ◆ ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ LEDﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ. ◆ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ. .٥ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ/ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ. ◆ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. .٦ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ/ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻓﻬﺎ. ◆ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ. ◆ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ. ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ. ✤ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ/ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺑﺪء/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ. ✤ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻛﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺘﻲ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﻭﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺧﺮﺝ/ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ-ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ. ٦ STBY 00:00:00:00:40:05 720i F Recording... S Sepia 12:00AM 2006/01/01 00:00:02:00:40:03 720i F Recording... S Sepia 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:12:06 12:00AM 2006/01/01 ١١٩ ١١٩ STBY 00:00:02:00:40:03 VP-X205 00994K AR 097~122.indd 119 AR ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ :ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻲ ٢ ١ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻲ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻏﻲ .١ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻲ. .٢ﺃﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻹﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ. ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ [ ✤ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺻﻄﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﺷﻴﺎء ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﺹ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺳﻘﻮﻃﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺻﻄﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻲء. ١٢٠ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:12:07 VP-X205 00994K AR 097~122.indd 120 AR ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ :ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﺮ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ. .١ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ. ١ ◆ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻲ ﻛﻔﺘﺤﺘﻴﻦ. .٢ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺰﻳﻢ ﻹﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ. .٣ﺃﺣﻜﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ. ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺻﻄﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﺷﻴﺎء ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﺹ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺳﻘﻮﻃﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺻﻄﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻲء. ✤ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺪ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻲ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺞ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺪ .ﻟﺬﺍ، ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ. ٢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻲ ٣ ١٢١ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:12:08 VP-X205 00994K AR 097~122.indd 121 AR ٨ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ١٢٣ ......................................................................... USB ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ USBﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ١٢٣ ................................................................. ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ١٢٣ ................................................................................... ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ١٢٤ ....................................................................................... ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ١٢٤ ...................................................DV Media Pro 1.0 ١٢٥ ................................................................ Ulead Video Studio ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ١٢٦ .......................................................................... ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ١٢٦ ................................................ USB ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ١٢٧ .................................................................. ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ١٢٨ ..................................................... DVD/ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﻔﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ١٢٩ ................................... ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ١٣٠ ....................................................................................... ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ١٣٠ ..................................................................... DPOF ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ١٣١ ....................................................................................... ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ ١٣١ ....................................................... ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ١٣١ ....................................................... ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﻞ١٣٢ ................................................................................ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ١٣٢ ............................................ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ١٣٣ .................................................................. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺩ١٣٤ ............................................. ◆ ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ/ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ١٢٢ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:12:08 VP-X205 00994K AR 097~122.indd 122 AR ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ :ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ USB ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ USBﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USBﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ Microsoft Windowsﺃﻭ .Mac ✤ USB :Windows 98SE/MEﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ✤ Service Pack 4 :Windows 2000ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ USB -ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ✤ Service Pack 1 :Windows XPﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ USB -ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ✤ 10.3 :Mac OS Xﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ USB -ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ Macintosh ﺑﻴﺌﺔ Windows ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ٦٠٠ ،Pentium IIIﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ٢ ،Pentium 4ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ٥٠٠ G3ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ G4 ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ Windows 98SE/ME Windows 2000/XP Mac OS 10.2 Mac OS 10.3 ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ١٢٨ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ٥١٢ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ١٢٨ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ٥١٢ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ✤ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ٢٠٠ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ )ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ( ﻭﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ، ١ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ٢ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ٢٠٠ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ )ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ( ﻭﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ، ١ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ٢ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ٦٠٠x٨٠٠ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ١٦ﺑﺖ ٧٦٨x١٠٢٤ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ٢٤ﺑﺖ ٦٠٠x٨٠٠ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ١٦ﺑﺖ ٧٦٨x١٠٢٤ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ٢٤ﺑﺖ USB USB 1.1 USB 2.0ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ USB 1.1 USB 2.0ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﻣﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻮﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ. ✤ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻥ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ USBﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ USBﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ USBﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ. ✤ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﻮ ،Windows 2000/XPﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻛـﻤﺴﺆﻭﻝ )ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ( )ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺆﻭﻝ( ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ✤ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ،ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ. ✤ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ،ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. ® ✤ ™ Intel Pentium IIIﺃﻭ ™ Pentium 4ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ .Intel Corporation ✤ ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ Macﻭ Macintoshﻭ Mac OSﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ .Apple Computer, Inc. ® ® ✤ Windowsﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ .Microsoft Corporation ✤ ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻬﻲ ﻣﻠﻚ ﻷﺻﺤﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﻴﻦ. 123 ١٢٣ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:13:18 VP-X205 00994K AR 123~142.indd 123 AR ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ :ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ DV Media Pro 1.0 ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ DV Media Pro 1.0ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USBﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء! ◆ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ .ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ◆ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻮﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ .ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ") "Startﺍﺑﺪﺃ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ") "Runﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ .ﺍﻛﺘﺐ " "D:\autorun.exeﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ) ENTERﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ،ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ "."D:Drive ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ DV Driver -ﻭ DirectX 9.0 ◆ ﻳﻌﺪ DV Driverﺃﺣﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ،ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ(. .١ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ " "DV Driverﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Setupﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(. ◆ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ. ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ) USB Removable disk (Windows 98 SEﻓﻘﻂ -ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ USB PC-CAMERA .٢ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ >) <Confirmﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ( ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ◆ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ Windows 98 SEﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. .٣ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ " ،"DirectX 9.0ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ "."DV Driver ◆ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ .DirectX 9.0 ◆ ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ DirectX9.0ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ،ﻓﻼ ﺩﺍﻉ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ Video Codec - ◆ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ " "Video CODECﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Setupﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(. ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ) Video Codecﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ [ ✤ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ") "Digital Signature not foundﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ( ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻬﻬﺎ ،ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻭﺍﺻﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ. 124 ١٢٤ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:13:18 VP-X205 00994K AR 123~142.indd 124 AR ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ :ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ – Photo Express .١ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ " "Photo Expressﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Setupﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(. ◆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ. ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ – Quick Time .١ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ " "Quick Timeﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Setupﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(. ◆ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ QuickTimeﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ Appleﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ،ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ )ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ٣٦٠ﺩﺭﺟﺔ. Ulead Video Studio ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ Ulead Video Studio ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Setupﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ .ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ. ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ) Sports Camcorderﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ(. ﻧﺤﻦ ﻻ ﻧﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ. ✤ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ .Photo Express ✤ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ DV Driver :ﺛﻢ DirectX 9.0ﺛﻢ Video Codec ✤ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ .Ulead Video Studio ✤ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ .DV Driver ✤ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ " "DV Driverﻭ" "Video Codecﻭ" "DirectX 9.0ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ DV Media Pro 1.0ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ. ✤ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ") "Digital Signature not foundﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ( ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻬﻬﺎ ،ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻭﺍﺻﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ. 125 ١٢٥ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:13:18 VP-X205 00994K AR 123~142.indd 125 AR ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ :ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USB ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USBﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ! USB ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ >) <USB Modeﻭﺿﻊ (USBﻋﻠﻰ >) <Mass Storageﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ( ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ٩٨ MMC/SD ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ – ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ .١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. .٢ﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USBﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ. .٣ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USB ◆ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ. USB ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ USB ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ. ً .٤ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ ﻭﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. >ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ <.USB MMC/SD MMC/SD .١ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ") " Safely remove hardwareﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺯﺭ ") "Stopﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(. .٢ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ] ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ [ ✤ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻷﻱ ﺳﺒﺐ ﺁﺧﺮ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﺼﻞ/ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ )ﻛﺎﺑﻞ (USBﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ USBﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭ USBﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ/ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ✤ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ١٢٣ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ .USBﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ USBﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ .ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ. ✤ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﺼﻠﺖ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USBﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ. ✤ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ. ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ،ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺄﻟﻮﻑ. 126 ١٢٦ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:13:20 VP-X205 00994K AR 123~142.indd 126 AR ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ :ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓً .ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. .١ﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ/ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺑـﺎﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ) ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( .٢ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ. DC IN .٣ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ DC IN ◆ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﺜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ/ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ. .٤ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ◆ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. .٥ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [PLAYﺃﻭ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Movie Playﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. .٦ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ/ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. ◆ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ. ◆ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘًﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ. ✤ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ،ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ. ✤ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ/ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻭ ًﻻ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺧﻞ/ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ. ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ٥١ 127 ١٢٧ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:13:21 VP-X205 00994K AR 123~142.indd 127 AR ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ :ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮDVD/ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ.DVD/ .١ﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ/ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. .٢ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ DVD/ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ. ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( )ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( .٣ﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ/ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ.DVD/ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ DC IN .٥ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ DVD/ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﻪ. DC IN .٤ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ.DVD/ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ. ✤ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ/ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻭ ًﻻ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺧﻞ/ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ .ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ٥١ 128 ١٢٨ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:13:23 VP-X205 00994K AR 123~142.indd 128 AR ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ :ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﻔﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﻔﺮﺓ. .١ﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ/ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. .٢ﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ/ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ) DVDﺃﻭ ،DVCﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ( ﺑﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ. ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ .٣ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ◆ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) Movie Recordﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(. DC IN .٤ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ].[MENU ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻳﺴﺎﺭًﺍ/ﻳﻤﻴﻨًﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ><Line In/Out )ﺩﺧﻞ/ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ(. .٥ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]ﻗﺮﺹﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ > <Inﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[. .٦ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ. .٧ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ. .٨ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ [ ✤ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺻﺪﺭﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ) ،DVC ،DVDﺇﻟﺦ(. 129 ١٢٩ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:13:26 VP-X205 00994K AR 123~142.indd 129 AR ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ :ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ DPOF ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ) DPOFﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ( ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ .ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ DPOFﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ. ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ DPOFﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ .١ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ DPOFﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ. .٢ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ .DPOF .٣ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ. ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ٧٢ ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ [ ✤ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ،ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ. ✤ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ. ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ JPEGﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻭﺍﻃﺒﻌﻬﺎ. 130 ١٣٠ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:13:26 VP-X205 00994K AR 123~142.indd 130 AR ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ :ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ✤ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ✓ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ✓ ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ .٢٢ ✓ ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ .٣٤ ✤ ✤ ✤ ✤ ﻟﻠﺤﻴﻠﻮﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺃﻱ ﺿﺮﺭ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،LCDﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ. ﻻ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ. ﺣﺮﺻﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ،ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ. ً ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ: ✓ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺨﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ. ✓ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺻﻄﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ. ✓ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ )ﻓﻮﻕ ٥٠ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ١٢٢ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ )ﺗﺤﺖ ٠ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ٣٢ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(. ✓ ﻣﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﻛﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ. ✓ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ. ✤ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ،ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: ✓ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ،ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ. ✓ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ .ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺨﻠﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ. ✓ ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ .ﻻ ﺗﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﻟﻘﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ. ✓ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ .ﻭﻻ ﻳﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻴﺒًﺎ ﺑﻬﺎ. ✓ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺧﺬﺕ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺼﺎﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ،ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺷﻚ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء .ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ. ✤ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ✓ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺨﻴﻦ ﻭﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ .ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ. ✓ ﻻ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ. ✓ ﺿﻊ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ✓ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ. ✓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. 131 ١٣١ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:13:26 VP-X205 00994K AR 123~142.indd 131 AR ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ :ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﻞ ✤ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ✓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻣﻠﺴﺎء ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ .ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﻞ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ. ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ. ✓ ﻻ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ .LCDﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻣﻠﺴﺎء ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ. ✓ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﺎﻓﺦ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ .ﻻ ﺗﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ. ✓ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﻫﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ .ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ. ✓ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻓﺼﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ] ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ [ ✤ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻱ ﻗﺒﻞ ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ .ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ✤ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻕ ،ﻓﺴﻴﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻼﻝ ٥ﺃﻳﺎﻡ .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ،ﺻﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ .ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ٢٤ﺳﺎﻋﺔ. ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. 132 ١٣٢ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:13:27 VP-X205 00994K AR 123~142.indd 132 AR ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ :ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ١٠ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ) ٥٠ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ. ﻭﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ. ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻴﺐ ﻟﺘﺪﻓﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺭﻛﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓً. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ.ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ً ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ. ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻀﻌﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺠﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ. ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺎء. ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺎء. ■ ■ ■ ■ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﻟﻘﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ. ﻻ ﺗﻔﻚ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ .ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﺠﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﺘﻌﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻴﺮﺍﻥ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ. ﺇﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻮﺹ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺮﻳﺢ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺮﻭﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﻺﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ .ﺇﻥ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ . ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ،ﻓﺄﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ. ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ .ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ،ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺒﻘﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻬﺎ. ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ .ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻋﻬﺎ، ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ. ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ. ﻻ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﺮ. 133 ١٣٣ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:13:27 VP-X205 00994K AR 123~142.indd 133 AR ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ :ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺩ ✤ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ(NTSC/PAL) . ✤ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺩ ،ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ✤ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ١٠٠ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ٢٤٠ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺑﺘﺮﺩﺩ ٦٠/٥٠ﻫﺮﺗﺰ. ✤ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ،ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ. ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ✤ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCDﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ. ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺗﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻨﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ PALﻭﺃﻥ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ/ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ .ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ .(PAL-NTSC ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ/ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ PAL ﺃﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ ،ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺴﺎ ،ﺑﻠﺠﻴﻜﺎ ،ﺑﻠﻐﺎﺭﻳﺎ ،ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻦ ،ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻣﻨﻮﻟﺚ ،ﺟﻤﻬﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻴﻚ ،ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻧﻤﺎﺭﻙ ،ﻣﺼﺮ ،ﻓﻨﻠﻨﺪﺍ ،ﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ ،ﺃﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺎ ،ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻧﺎﻥ ،ﺑﺮﻳﻄﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻈﻤﻰ ،ﻫﻮﻟﻨﺪﺍ ،ﻫﻮﻧﺞ ﻛﻮﻧﺞ ،ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺮ ،ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪ ،ﺇﻳﺮﺍﻥ ،ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺍﻕ، ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ ،ﻟﻴﺒﻴﺎ ،ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺎ ،ﻣﻮﺭﻳﺸﻴﻮﺱ ،ﺍﻟﻨﺮﻭﻳﺞ ،ﺭﻭﻣﺎﻧﻴﺎ ،ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ ،ﺳﻨﻐﺎﻓﻮﺭﺓ ،ﺟﻤﻬﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻓﺎﻙ ،ﺇﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺎ ،ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻳﺪ ،ﺳﻮﻳﺴﺮﺍ ،ﺳﻮﺭﻳﺎ ،ﺗﺎﻳﻼﻧﺪ ،ﺗﻮﻧﺲ ،ﺇﻟﺦ. ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ/ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ NTSC ﺟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻬﺎﻣﺎ ،ﻛﻨﺪﺍ ،ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ،ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ،ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺴﻴﻚ ،ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺒﻴﻦ ،ﻛﻮﺭﻳﺎ ،ﺗﺎﻳﻮﺍﻥ ،ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ،ﺇﻟﺦ. 134 ١٣٤ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:13:27 VP-X205 00994K AR 123~142.indd 134 AR ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ) Not enough free spaceﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ( ) Corrupted fileﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﺎﻟﻒ( ) Paper errorﺧﻄﺄ ﻭﺭﻕ!( ) Ink errorﺧﻄﺄ ﺣﺒﺮ!( ) File Errorﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻒ!( ) Communication Errorﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ!( ) Low batteryﺷﺤﻦ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ( ) Holding the keyﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ( ) Card errorﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ) Not formattedﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻬﻴﺄ( ) Write errorﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ( ) Read errorﺧﻄﺄ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ( ) Not supported formatﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ( ) Write protectedﻣﺤﻤﻲ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ( ) MPEG decoding errorﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻞ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ (MPEG ﺗﻌﻨﻲ… ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ. ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ. ﻧﻔﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ. ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ. ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺧﻄﺄ. ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ. ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ. ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ HOLDﻣﻘﻔﻞ. ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ. ﺗﻌﺬﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ. ﺗﻌﺬﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ. ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ. ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ. ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ. ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ. ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻒ. ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ .ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﺭﻕ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺭﻗًﺎ. ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ. ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ .JPEG ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USBﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ HOLDﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ. ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ. ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ. ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ AVIﺃﻭ JPEGﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ .ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ .٣٠ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ) .ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﻧﻮﻉ (MMC ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻒ. ✤ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺘﻚ ،ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﻛﻴﻞ Samsungﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ/ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ. ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ/ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ. ﻧﻔﺪﺕ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ. ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ. ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ/ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ. ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻈﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻐﻄﺎﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺨﺎﺭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ. ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺟﺴﻢ ﻏﺮﻳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ. ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺻﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺟﻴﺪًﺍ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ٢٥ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻓﺌًﺎ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ١٠٤ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) AUTOﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ٣٤ ﻧﻈﻒ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ 135 ١٣٥ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:13:28 VP-X205 00994K AR 123~142.indd 135 AR ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ. ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ )ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ( ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺟﺪًﺍ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCDﺳﺎﺧﻦ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photoﺻﻮﺭﺓ(( ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCDﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photoﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ) Movie Modeﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴًﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Photoﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCD ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ )ﺣﺴﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(. ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCDﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCD ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ٤٣ﻭ٦١ ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ )ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ( ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ٤٥ﻭ٦٣ ﺃﺯﻝ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ (MMC ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ٥٤ﻭ ٧٣ﻭ ٨١ﻭ ٨٨ﻭ ٩٣ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ LCD ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCDﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻴﺒًﺎ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCDﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻴﺒﺮﺩ. ﺣﺪﺩ ') 'Movie Modeﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ') 'Playﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(. ﺣﺪﺩ ') 'Photo Modeﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ') 'Viewﻋﺮﺽ(. ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Flashﻓﻼﺵ( ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔًﺎ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ٦٤ ﺣﺪﺩ ') 'Movie Modeﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻪ 136 ١٣٦ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:13:28 VP-X205 00994K AR 123~142.indd 136 AR ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ .١ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ٧٢٠x٥٧٦ ٣٥٢x٢٨٨ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺁﻟﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﺭ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ( ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ BLC ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ TV PC ﺩﺧﻞ/ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ In Out .٢ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺁﻟﻲ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻲ ﺿﻮء ﺛﻠﺞ /ﺭﻣﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻓﻦ ﻓﺴﻴﻔﺴﺎء ﺑﻨﻲ ﻧﻴﺠﺎﺗﻴﻒ ﻣﺮﺁﺓ B&W ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ EIS ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ AF MF MP3 ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ OK ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ .١ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺁﻟﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﺭ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺁﻟﻲ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻲ ﺿﻮء ﺛﻠﺞ /ﺭﻣﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻓﻦ ﻓﺴﻴﻔﺴﺎء ﺑﻨﻲ ﻧﻴﺠﺎﺗﻴﻒ ﻣﺮﺁﺓ B&W ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺁﻟﻲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ3 BLC ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ .٢ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ )ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ DPOF ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ .١ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺧﻠﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺧﻠﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﻮﺏ ﻛﻼﺳﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺟﺎﺯ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ OK ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ OK ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ EIS ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ AF MF 137 ١٣٧ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:13:29 VP-X205 00994K AR 123~142.indd 137 AR ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ .١ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ .٢ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ OK ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ OK ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ OK ﺿﺒﻂﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ/ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ PictBridge PC-Cam ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ YY/MM/DD DD/MM/YY MM/DD/YY ﻭﺿﻊ USB 12ﺳﺎﻋﺔ 24ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ/ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 0% ... 100% ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ 5ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ 000ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ 000/ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ 0% ... 100% ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ 5ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ/ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺪء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ OK Language / Español / English / Português / Français / Italiano / Deutsch / Nederlands / Polski / / /Русский / Magyar / Arab / Iran / Українська / ไทย Svenska 138 ١٣٨ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:13:30 VP-X205 00994K AR 123~142.indd 138 AR ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ MP3 ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ CCD Pixel ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ/ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCD ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ USB ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺘﺎ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺩﺧﻞ/ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ/ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ×ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ×ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ VP-X205L/X210L/X220L ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ MPEG4 AVI (Exif 2.2 ،DPOF ،٤٨٠×٦٤٠) JPEG ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ/ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ) WAVEﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ٨ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ١٦ ،ﺑﺖ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ( ٥١٢ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ )(VP-X205L ١ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ )(VP-X210L ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ٢ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ )(VP-X220L SD ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ MMC ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ١\٦ CCDﺑﻮﺻﺔ ٨٠٠ ،ﺃﻟﻒ )ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ( x10 ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ = ٢٫٤ﺇﻟﻰ ٢٤ﻣﻢ ،ﺳﻌﺔ ١٫٨ﺇﻟﻰ ٢٫٤ 3.0 Lux ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ٢٫٠ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ٢٣٠ ،ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻧﻮﻉ Bﺻﻐﻴﺮ ) USB 2.0ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ( ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ ٣ﺳﻨﻮﻥ ٣٫٥ øﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ) ،(75Ω ،1.0p_pﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ) ،-7.5dBm 47KΩﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ( ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ CMOSﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ٠ﺇﻟﻰ ٤٠ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ) ٣٢ﺇﻟﻰ ١٠٤ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( ٪٨٠-٪١٠ ٣٫٨ﻓﻮﻟﺖ )ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺑﻮﻟﻴﻤﺮ( ٤٫٨ ،ﻓﻮﻟﺖ )ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ( ٢٫٨ﻭﺍﺕ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ٦١٫٣ﻣﻢ × ٩٣٫٦ﻣﻢ × ٣٠٫٣ﻣﻢ )ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨًﺎ ﻋﺒﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ( ١٥٠ﺟﻢ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻣﻜﺜﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ 139 ١٣٩ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:13:30 VP-X205 00994K AR 123~142.indd 139 AR ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ CMOSﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ CMOS ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ/ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺔﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝxﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽxﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ VP-X205L/X210L/X220L ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ٢٤٠ – ١٠٠ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ٦٠/٥٠ ،ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ٤٫٨ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ١٫٠ ،ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ٠ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ) ٣٢ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( ﺇﻟﻰ ٤٠ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ) ١٠٤ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( ٧٠ﻣﻢ × ٢٩٫٧ﻣﻢ × ٥٩٫١ﻣﻢ ٨٥٫١ﺟﻢ XC-L2P ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ١\٣ CMOSﺑﻮﺻﺔ ٣٢٠ ،ﺃﻟﻒ )ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ( (VGA) ٤٨٠x٦٤٠ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ = ٥٫٥٦ﻣﻢ ،ﺳﻌﺔ ٢٫٠ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ) ،(1.0Vp_pﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ) ،-7.5dBm 47KΩﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ :ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( ٠ﺇﻟﻰ ٤٠ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ) ٣٢ﺇﻟﻰ ١٠٤ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( ٪٨٠~٪٢٠ ٣٫٢) B+ﺇﻟﻰ ٤٫٨ﻓﻮﻟﺖ( ٠٫٧ﻭﺍﺕ ٩٤٫٥ﻣﻢ × ٣٤٫٧ﻣﻢ × ٣٣ﻣﻢ ٩٦ﺟﻢ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻣﻜﺜﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻳﺨﻀﻊ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺗﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ. 140 ١٤٠ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:13:30 VP-X205 00994K AR 123~142.indd 140 AR ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ) AFﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ٦٧ ،٤٧ ......................................................................... ٦٨ .................................................................................................... BLC ١٣٠ ،٧٢ ......................................................................................... DPOF ١٢٥ ،١٢٤ ..................................................................... DV Media Pro 1.0 ) MFﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ( ٦٧ ،٤٧ ......................................................................... ١١١........................................................................................... Language ١١٧..............................................................................................PC Cam ١١٦...........................................................................................PictBridge ) Program AEﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ٦٢ ،٤٤ .............................................................. ) Sepiaﺑﻨﻲ(٦٣ ،٤٥ ...................................................................................... ٩٨ .................................................................................................... USB -ﺃ- ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ١٣٦ ،١٣٥ ................................................................. ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ١١٠............................................................................................... ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ١١٢............................................................................................. ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ٩٣ ،٨٨ ،٨١ ،٧٣ ،٥٤ ............................................................................... ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ٥٧ .................................................................................................... ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ١٠٣............................................................................................. -ﺏ- ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ٥٨ ،٣٧ ................................................................................... ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ١٣٤~١٣١............................................................................... ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ١٠٠...................................................................................................... -ﺝ- ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ٤٢ ..................................................................................................... -ﺡ- ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ١١٤.......................................................................................... -ﺭ- ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ٩٩ ................................................................................................. -ﺯ- ﺯﺭ ٢٨ ............................................................................................ MENU ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ٢٧ ................................................................................................ -ﺱ- ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ٢٥~٢٢ ............................................................................................. ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ١٠٢................................................................................................... ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺘﺎ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ١٤ ............................................................................................. ﺑﻨﻲ٦٣ ،٤٥ ................................................................................................... ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ٨٤ ........................................................................................... ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ٦٩ ،٤٩ ......................................................................................... -ﺵ- -ﺕ- ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ٢٥ ........................................................................................... 141 ١٤١ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:13:31 VP-X205 00994K AR 123~142.indd 141 AR ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ -ﺹ- ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ١٠٨............................................................................................. -ﻭ- ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) Start-upﺑﺪء(١٠٩............................................................................... -ﺽ- ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ/ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ١٠٤..................................................................................... -ﻉ- ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ١١٣........................................................................................ -ﻕ- ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ٢٨ .............................................................................................. -ﻡ- ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ٩٠ ............................................................................................. ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ٢٥ ،١٣ ...................................................................... ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ٦١ ،٤٣ ..................................................................................... -ﻥ- ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ٩٤ ،٨٩ ،٨٢ ،٧٤ ،٥٥ ........................................................................... ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ٩٧ ............................................................................................. 142 ١٤٢ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:13:31 VP-X205 00994K AR 123~142.indd 142 EN ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ SAMSUNGﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﺤﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﺡ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ،SAMSUNGﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ .SAMSUNG AR 143 ١٤٣ 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:13:32 VP-X205 00994K AR 123~142.indd 143 AR ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ: ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺗﺤﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ )(RoHS ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ "ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ" ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺮﺓ ﻭﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺩﻣﻴﻮﻡ ) (Cdﻭﺍﻟﺮﺻﺎﺹ )(Pb ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺋﺒﻖ ) (Hgﻭﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﻣﻴﻮﻡ ﺳﺪﺍﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺎﻓﺆ ) (Cr+6ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻮﻟﻲ ﺑﺮﻭﻣﻴﻨﺎﺗﺪ ﺑﻴﻔﻴﻨﻴﻠﺲ ) (PBBsﻭﺍﻟﺒﻮﻟﻲ ﺑﺮﻭﻣﻴﻨﺎﺗﺪ ﺩﻳﻔﻴﻨﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﺜﺮ ) (PBDEsﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺗﻨﺎ. 2006-04-03 ¿ÀÈÄ 12:02:20 VP-X205 00994K AR 001~007.indd 2